Honda Manual BTY21616OM
User Manual: Honda Manual 2016 Acura RLX Owners Manual | Manual Device
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 561
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
0 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits
chemicals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Event Data Recorders
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
00X31-TY2-6200
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
2016 RLX Owner's Manual
BOM00331
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
1 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
A Few Words About Safety
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
● Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgment.
3DANGER
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don’t follow instructions.
3WARNING
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don’t follow instructions.
3CAUTION
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
2 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Contents
This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features.
2 Safe Driving P. 25
For Safe Driving P. 26
Seat Belts P. 30
Airbags P. 37
2 Instrument Panel P. 67
Indicators P. 68
Gauges and Multi-Information Display P. 97
2 Controls P. 113
Clock P. 114
Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 115
Opening and Closing the Moonroof P. 136
Adjusting the Seats P. 156
2 Features P. 191
Audio System P. 192
Customized Features P. 265
Audio System Basic Operation P. 196
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver P. 291
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.
2 Driving P. 341
The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.
Before Driving P. 342
Towing a Trailer P. 347
Multi-View Rear Camera * P. 429
Surround View Camera System * P. 430
2 Maintenance P. 445
Before Performing Maintenance P. 446
Maintenance MinderTM P. 449
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 472
Climate Control System Maintenance P. 487
2 Handling the Unexpected P. 493
Tools P. 494
If a Tire Goes Flat P. 495
Overheating P. 520
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 522
When You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 533
2 Information P. 535
Specifications P. 536
Emissions Testing P. 541
Identification Numbers P. 538
Warranty Coverages P. 543
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
3 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Contents
Quick Reference Guide
Child Safety P. 52
Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 64
Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 128
Security System P. 131
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 137
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 163
Audio Error Messages P. 256
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 293
P. 4
Safety Labels P. 65
Opening and Closing the Windows P. 134
Adjusting the Mirrors P. 153
Climate Control System P. 181
General Information on the Audio System P. 261
AcuraLink® P. 333
When Driving P. 348
Refueling P. 440
Braking P. 405
Fuel Economy P. 442
Parking Your Vehicle P. 420
Accessories and Modifications P. 443
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 454
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 475
Cleaning P. 488
Replacing Light Bulbs P. 466
Battery P. 484
Remote Transmitter Care P. 485
Engine Does Not Start P. 513
Fuses P. 526
Refueling P. 534
Jump Starting P. 516
Emergency Towing P. 531
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 539
Authorized Manuals P. 545
Reporting Safety Defects P. 540
Client Service Information P. 546
Safe Driving
P. 25
Instrument Panel
P. 67
Controls
P. 113
Features
P. 191
Driving
P. 341
Maintenance
P. 445
Handling the Unexpected
P. 493
Information
P. 535
Index
P. 550
Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 519
When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 532
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
4 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide
❙ System Indicators (P 68)
❙ Gauges (P 97)
❙ Multi-Information Display
(P 98)
❙
(Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System OFF) Button (P 397)
❙ Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
Button * (P 383)
❙ Road Departure Mitigation (RDM)
Button * (P 386)
❙ Parking Sensor System Button* (P 422)
❙ Headlight Washer Button * (P 147)
❙ Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) OFF Button * (P 415)
❙ Audio/Information Screen (P 205)
❙ Navigation System
() See the Navigation System Manual
❙ Hazard Warning Button
❙ On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
(P 197)
❙ Audio System (P 192)
❙ Climate Control System (P 181)
❙ CAMERA Button * (P 431)
❙ Rear Window Defogger/
Heated Mirror Button (P 149)
❙ Front Seat Heater Buttons * (P 176)
❙ Front Seat Heater and Seat
Ventilation Buttons * (P 177)
❙ ENGINE START/STOP Button (P 137)
❙ Steering Wheel Adjustments (P 152)
4
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
5 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift down) (P 358)
❙ Audio Remote Controls (P 195)
❙ Brightness Control (P 148)
❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift up) (P 358)
Quick Reference Guide
❙ Headlights/Turn Signals (P 140, 141)
❙ CAMERA Button * (P 431)
❙ Wipers/Washers (P 145)
❙ Cruise Control Buttons * (P 360)
❙ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow (LSF) Buttons * (P 365)
❙ Right Selector Wheel (P 98)
❙ TRIP Button (P 99)
❙ Distance Button * (P 373)
❙ Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Button * (P 391)
❙ Horn (Press an area around
.)
*
❙ Heated Steering Wheel Button (P 175)
❙ Voice Control Buttons (P 211)
❙ Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System
Voice Control Buttons (P 293)
* Not available on all models
5
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
6 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide
❙ Memory Buttons (P 151)
❙ SET Button (P 151)
❙ Power Window Switches (P 134)
❙ Power Door Lock Master Switch (P 126)
❙ Door Mirror Controls (P 154)
❙ Trunk Release Button (P 128)
❙ Fuel Fill Door Release Button (P 441)
❙ Rearview Mirror (P 153)
❙ Driver’s Front Airbag (P 40)
❙ Passenger’s Front Airbag (P 40)
❙ Electric Parking Brake Switch
(P 405)
❙ Automatic Brake Hold Button
(P 408)
❙ SPORT Button (P 359)
❙ Shift Lever
Automatic Transmission (P 355)
❙ Passenger’s Side Interior Fuse
Box (P 529)
❙ Driver’s Knee Airbag (P 44)
❙ Driver’s Side Interior Fuse Box (P 528)
❙ Hood Release Handle (P 455)
6
❙ Glove Box (P 165)
❙ Accessory Power Socket (P 171)
❙ USB Port (P 193)
❙ Auxiliary Input Jack (P 193)
❙ Accessory Power Socket (P 171)
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
7 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
❙ Seat Belts (P 30)
❙ Moonroof Switch
(P 136)
Quick Reference Guide
❙ Side Curtain Airbags (P 48)
❙ Map Lights (P 164)
❙ Grab Handle
❙ Coat Hook (P 172)
❙ Map Lights (P 164)
❙ Sunglasses Holder
(P 178)
❙ Power Rear Sunshade
Button * (P 179)
❙ Sun Visors
❙ Vanity Mirrors
❙ Front Seat (P 156)
❙ Side Airbags (P 46)
❙ Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 59)
❙ Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 61)
❙ Rear Seat
❙ LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 57)
* Not available on all models
7
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
8 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide
❙ Maintenance Under the Hood (P 454)
❙ Windshield Wipers (P 145, 472)
❙ Power Door Mirrors (P 154)
❙ Door Lock/Unlock Control (P 118)
❙ Headlights (P 141, 466)
❙ Front Side Marker Lights (P 140, 468)
❙ Tires (P 475, 495)
❙ Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights (P 140, 467)
❙ How to Refuel (P 441)
❙ High-Mount Brake Light (P 471)
❙ Opening/Closing the Trunk (P 128)
❙ Emergency Trunk Release Lever (P 130)
❙ Trunk Release Button (P 128)
❙ Multi-View Rear Camera * (P 429)
❙ Surround View Camera System * (P 430)
❙ Rear License Plate Lights (P 471)
❙ Back-Up Lights (P 470)
❙ Taillights (P 470)
❙ Rear Turn Signal Lights (P 469)
❙ Rear Side Marker Lights (P 469)
❙ Brake/Taillights (P 469)
8
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
9 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
Safe Driving
火曜日
午後５時３６分
(P 25)
● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P 52)
● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Quick Reference Guide
Airbags (P 37)
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 64)
● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.
Seat Belts (P 30)
Before Driving Checklist (P 29)
● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
● Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.
* Not available on all models
9
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
10 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
Instrument Panel
火曜日
午後５時３６分
(P 67)
Quick Reference Guide
Gauges (P 97)/Multi-Information Display (P 98)/System Indicators (P 68)
System Indicators
Blind Spot Information
(BSI) Indicator *
Electric Power Steering
(EPS) System Indicator
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
SPORT Mode Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA®) System
Indicator
System Indicators
Multi-Information Display
CRUISE MAIN Indicator
*
Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) Indicator *
Tachometer
CRUISE CONTROL
Indicator *
Lane Keeping Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator *
Speedometer
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Keyless Access System
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Automatic Brake Hold
System Indicator
U.S.
U.S. Electric Parking Brake
Indicator
Canada
10
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
Brake System
Indicator (Amber)
Canada
Temperature
Gauge
Shift Lever Position
Indicator
Security System Alarm
Indicator
Fuel
Gauge
Gear Position Indicator
Canada
Electric Parking Brake
System Indicator
U.S.
Canada
VSA® OFF Indicator
U.S. Automatic Brake Hold
Indicator
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
System Indicators
Lights Indicators
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
Lights On Indicator
System Message
Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) Indicator */Road
Departure Mitigation
(RDM) Indicator *
Forward Collision
Warning (FCW)
Indicator */Collision
Mitigation Braking
SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Indicator *
Low Fuel Indicator
Precision All-Wheel
SteerTM (P-AWS®)
System Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
Controls
11 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
(P 113)
ENGINE START/STOP
Button (P 137)
Press the button to changes the vehicle’s
power mode.
Turn Signals (P 140)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Right
You can also adjust the time manually.
Quick Reference Guide
Clock (P 114)
The navigation system receives signals from
GPS satellites, updating the clock
automatically.
Left
a
Enter the Clock Adjustment screen.
2 Clock (P 114)
b
Rotate
.
to change hour, then press
c
Rotate
press
.
to change minute, then
Lights (P 141)
Light Control Switches
High Beam
Low Beam
Flashing
* Not available on all models
11
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
12 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Quick Reference Guide
Wipers and Washers
Steering Wheel (P 152)
(P 145)
● To adjust, push and hold the adjustment
switch to move the steering wheel to the
desired position.
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Adjustment Ring
: Low sensitivity*1
: Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2
: High sensitivity*1
: Higher speed, more sweeps*2
Trunk Release Button
● To unlock and open the trunk:
Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.
MIST
OFF
AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies automatically
INT*2: Low speed with intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Unlocking the Front
Doors from the Inside
(P 124)
● Pull either front door inner handle to
unlock and open it in one motion.
*1:Models with auto wiper
*2:Models without auto wiper
● Unlocking and opening the driver’s door
from the inner handle unlocks all the
other doors.
12
Trunk (P 128)
• Press the trunk release button on the
driver’s door.
• Press the trunk release button on the
keyless access remote.
• Press the trunk release button on the
trunk lid.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
13 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
Power Door Mirrors
(P 154)
Folding Button *
Selector Switch
午後５時３６分
Power Windows (P 134)
● With the power mode in ON, open and
close the power windows.
● If the power window lock button is in the
off position, each passenger’s window
can be opened and closed with its own
switch.
● If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator on), each
passenger’s window switch is disabled.
Power Window Lock Button
Quick Reference Guide
● With the power mode in ON, move the
selector switch to L or R.
● Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
● Press the folding button * to fold in and
out the door mirrors.
火曜日
Indicator
Adjustment Switch
Window Switch
* Not available on all models
13
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
14 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Climate Control System (P 181)
Quick Reference Guide
● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
● Press the
button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the
button to defrost the windshield.
The climate control system is voice operable. (P 211)
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Fan Control Icon
A/C (Air Conditioning) and
SYNC (Synchronized) Icon
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode
Icon
Driver’s Side Mode Control
Icon
Passenger’s Side Mode Control
Icon
Driver’s Side Temperature
Icon
Passenger’s Side Temperature
Icon
Driver’s Side Temperature
Control Switch
Passenger’s Side Temperature
Control Switch
(On/off) Button
AUTO Button
(Windshield Defroster) Button
Air flows from dashboard vents.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.
(driver’s side only)
14
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
15 ページ
Features
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
(P 191)
Audio/Information Screen
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
CD Slot
Quick Reference Guide
Audio system (P 196)
(Power) Button
VOL (Volume) Knob
Audio Source*1
Preset Icons
(CD Eject) Button
Shortcuts*1
*1
TAG*1
Tune
(Tune Down) Icon*1
PHONE Button
More
(Tune Up) Icon*1
INFO Button
AUDIO Button
NAV Button
BACK Button
Button
MENU Button
SETTINGS Button
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
*1:Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source selected.
15
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
16 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
● Audio Remote Controls (P 195)
Left Selector Wheel
Quick Reference Guide
SOURCE Button
● SOURCE Button
Press to change the audio mode: FM/AM/
CD/SiriusXM®/HDD/USB/iPod/Bluetooth®
Audio/Pandora® */AhaTM/AUX.
● Left Selector Wheel
Roll to adjust the volume up/down.
Radio:Shift to change the preset station.
Shift and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
CD/HDD/USB device:
Shift to skip to the beginning of
the next song or return to the
beginning of the current song.
Shift and hold to change a folder.
16
火曜日
午後５時３６分
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
Driving
17 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
(P 341)
● Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the
engine.
Paddle Shifters (P358)
● Paddle shifters allow you to shift gears much like a manual
transmission (1st through 6th). This is useful for engine braking.
M Indicator
Shift Lever
Release Button
● Shifting
Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.
Shift Down (Paddle Shifter
Reverse
Used when reversing.
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Drive
Normal driving. The sequential
shift mode can be used.
Shift
Lever
Position
Indicator
Selected
Gear
Number
Shift Up (+
Paddle Shifter
● D-paddle shift mode: The
transmission will shift back to
automatic mode once the
system detects that the vehicle
is cruising.
● Sequential shift mode: Holds
the selected gear, and the M
indicator comes on, when the
SPORT mode is on.
● The selected gear position is
shown in the instrument
panel.
Quick Reference Guide
Automatic Transmission (P 355)
SPORT Button
Depress the brake pedal and press the
release button to move out of (P .
Press the release button to move the
shift lever.
Move the shift lever without pressing
the release button.
* Not available on all models
17
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
18 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
VSA® OFF Button (P 397)
Quick Reference Guide
● The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system
helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
● VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
● To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
午後５時３６分
Refueling (P 440)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded premium gasoline with a pump octane
number 91 or higher recommended
Fuel tank capacity: 18.5 US gal (70 L)
a
Press the fuel fill door
release button.
b
After refueling, wait for
about five seconds
before removing the
filler nozzle.
Cruise Control * (P 360)
● Cruise control allows you to maintain a
set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
● To use cruise control, press the CRUISE
button, then press the RES/+/SET/– switch
down once you have achieved the desired
speed (above 25 mph or 40 km/h).
Collision Mitigation
Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
OFF Button* (P 415)
● When a possible collision is likely
unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to
reduce the vehicle speed and the severity
of the collision.
● To turn the CMBSTM on or off, press and
hold the button until you hear a beep.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (P 401)
● The TPMS monitors tire pressure.
● The TPMS is turned on automatically
every time you start the engine.
18
火曜日
Wait for five seconds
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
19 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
Maintenance
火曜日
午後５時３６分
(P 445)
a
Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.
b
Locate the hood latch lever, push up the lever and lift the
hood.
c
Quick Reference Guide
Under the Hood (P 454)
● Check engine oil and engine coolant. Add when necessary.
● Check brake fluid.
● Check the battery condition monthly.
Wiper Blades (P 472)
● Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield.
Tires (P 475)
Lights (P 466)
● Inspect tires and wheels regularly.
● Check tire pressures regularly.
● Install snow tires for winter driving.
● Inspect all lights regularly.
When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.
* Not available on all models
19
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
20 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Handling the Unexpected
Quick Reference Guide
Flat Tire (P 495)
Engine Won’t Start (P 513)
Overheating (P 520)
● Park in a safe location and repair the flat
tire using the temporary tire repair kit.
● If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.
● Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.
Blown Fuse
Emergency Towing
Vehicles with optional spare tire kit
Park in a safe location and replace the
flat tire with the compact spare tire in the
trunk.
Indicators Come On
(P 522)
● Identify the indicator and consult the
owner’s manual.
20
(P 493)
(P 526)
● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.
(P 531)
● Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
21 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
What to Do If
The shift lever should be moved to (P .
Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?
This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.
The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the
vehicle. Why?
Check if the childproof lock is in the
LOCK position. If so, open the rear
door with the outside door handle.
To cancel this function, push the
lever to the UNLOCK position.
Quick Reference Guide
The power mode does not
change from ON to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Why?
21
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
Quick Reference Guide
22
22 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors
using a remote
transmitter?
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.
Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver’s door?
The beeper sounds when:
● The power mode is in ACCESSORY.
● The exterior lights are left on.
Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?
The beeper sounds when the driver and/or front passenger are
not wearing their seat belts.
Why does the beeper
sound when I turn the
engine off?
The beeper sounds when you turn off the engine with the
driver’s door open.
Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
23 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal
depressed.
Depressing the accelerator
pedal does not release the
parking brake
automatically. Why?
●
Is it possible to use
unleaded gasoline with a
Pump Octane Number
(PON) of 87 or lower on
this vehicle?
Unleaded gasoline with a Pump Octane Number (PON) of 91 or
higher is recommended.
Use of lower octane gasoline can cause occasional metallic
knocking noise in the engine and will result in decreased engine
performance.
Use of gasoline with a pump octane less than 87 can lead to
engine damage.
●
Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
Check if the shift lever is in (P or (N . If so, move the lever to
any other position.
Quick Reference Guide
Pressing the electric
parking brake switch does
not release the parking
brake. Why?
23
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
24
24 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
25 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions ............. 26
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features............ 28
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts........................ 30
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 33
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 36
Airbags
Airbag System Components............... 37
Types of Airbags ................................ 40
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 40
Driver’s Knee Airbag .......................... 44
Side Airbags ...................................... 46
Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 48
Airbag System Indicators.................... 49
Airbag Care ....................................... 51
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 52
Safety of Infants and Small Children .......54
Safety of Larger Children ................... 62
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 64
Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 65
25
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
26 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions
■ Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
■ Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.
■ Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
■ Don’t drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either.
26
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
27 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions
■ Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
Safe Driving
■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.
■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
27
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
28 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
10
9
Safe Driving
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.
10
6
11
7
9
7
11
12
8
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Knee Airbag
Side Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Door Locks
Seat Belt Tensioners/Seat Belt
e-pretensioners *
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.
28
* Not available on all models
Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
29 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features
■ Safety Checklist
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 124
If the door and trunk open message appears on the
multi-information display, a door and/or the trunk is
not completely closed. Close all doors and the trunk
tightly until the message disappears.
2 Multi-Information Display Warning and
Information Messages P. 86
Safe Driving
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors are closed and locked.
Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider
from unexpectedly opening a door.
1Safety Checklist
• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 156
• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 159
• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 33
• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height
and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 52
29
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
30 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts
- side impacts
- rear impacts
- rollovers
■ Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body. The front passenger’s and rear seat belts also have a lockable
retractor for use with child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 59
30
1About Your Seat Belts
3 WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
The emergency locking retractor may lock if you lean
forward too quickly. Slower movements will allow
the belt to extend fully without locking.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
31 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
■ Seat Belt Reminder
1About Your Seat Belts
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.
Safe Driving
■ Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the
belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
1Seat Belt Reminder
Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If
the power mode is set to ON before the
driver’s seat belt is fastened, a beeper will
sound and the indicator will blink. If the driver
does not fasten the belt before the beeper
stops, the indicator will remain on.
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after
the power mode is set to ON.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat,
or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator
will not come on.
This is because the weight sensors in the seat cannot
detect their presence.
The beeper will periodically sound and the
indicator will blink while driving until the
driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts are
fastened.
Continued
31
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
32 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
■ Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
Safe Driving
The front seats are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front
seat belts during a moderate-to-severe frontal
collision, sometimes even if the collision is not
severe enough to inflate the front airbags or
the driver’s knee airbag.
■ Seat Belt e-pretensioners *
Are the motor-powered pretensioners that
start to retract the front seat belts when the
CMBSTM, brake assist system, or VSA® system
is in operation. They may also activate when
you steer the vehicle hard, or the vehicle is
impacted. After retracted, the seat belts are
slackened to their original positions.
As convenient features, the e-pretensioners
slightly retract the seat belts when you latch
the seat belt buckle, depress the brake pedal
more aggressively than you normally do, or
make a sharp turn, and fully retract when you
release the seat belt buckle.
32
* Not available on all models
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.
1Seat Belt e-pretensioners *
If only the e-pretensioners were activated, no
components need to be replaced.
The e-pretensioners may not work if:
• Supplemental Restraint System Indicator is on.
• Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System Indicator is
on.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
33 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 156
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
Correct
Seated
Posture.
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.
Safe Driving
Pull out slowly.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
Latch
Plate
Buckle
Models with CMBSTM
When you or the front passenger insert the
latch plate into the buckle, the front seat
belt retracts automatically.
2 Seat Belt e-pretensioners * P. 32
* Not available on all models
Continued
33
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
34 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
Lap belt
as low as
possible
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
■ Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter
occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
holding the release button.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
Push
34
1Fastening a Seat Belt
3 WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then
guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of
the way and will not get caught by closing the door.
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
anchor position is secure.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
35 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
■ Advice for Pregnant Women
Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
• When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
• When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.
Safe Driving
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.
35
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
36 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
Safe Driving
• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
• Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.
36
1Seat Belt Inspection
3 WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
37 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Airbags
Airbag System Components
11
10
9
8
Safe Driving
9
6
13
9
7
9
12
6
9
9
Continued
37
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
38 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
The front, driver’s knee, front side, and side
curtain airbags are deployed according to
the direction and severity of impact. Both
side curtain airbags are deployed in a
rollover. The airbag system includes:
monitors and can record information
about the sensors, the airbag activators,
the seat belt tensioners, and driver and
front passenger seat belt use when the
power mode is in ON.
i Impact
sensors that can detect a
moderate-to-severe front or side impact.
j An indicator on the dashboard that alerts
you that the front passenger’s front
airbag has been turned off.
a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.
b Driver’s
knee airbag. The knee airbag is
stored under the steering column. It is
marked SRS AIRBAG.
c Two
side airbags, one for the driver and
one for a front passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
d Two
side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
38
e An electronic control unit that continually
f Automatic
front seat belt tensioners. The
driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts
incorporate sensors that detect whether
or not they are fastened.
Models with CMBSTM
The front seat belt tensioners also include
the e-pretensioners.
gA
driver’s seat position sensor. If the seat
is too far forward, the airbag will inflate
with less force.
h Weight
sensors in the front passenger’s
seat. The front passenger’s airbag will be
turned off if the weight on the seat is 65
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant
or small child).
k An indicator on the instrument panel that
alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
l Safing
mA
Sensor
rollover sensor that detects whether
the vehicle is about to roll over.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
39 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
■ Important Facts About Your Airbags
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.
Safe Driving
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front and driver’s knee airbag covers.
Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the
airbags inflate.
39
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
40 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Types of Airbags
Safe Driving
Your vehicle is equipped with four types of airbags:
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
• Driver’s knee airbag: Airbag under the steering column.
• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-backs.
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.
1Types of Airbags
Front Airbags (SRS)
1Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary
restraint system.
■ Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
40
The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is
in ON.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a
small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion
process of the inflator material and is not harmful.
People with respiratory problems may experience
some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags
(SRS)
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiplethreshold front airbags (SRS).
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether the seat belts are latched, and/or
other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
41 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
■ Operation
Safe Driving
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
■ How the Front Airbags Work
1How the Front Airbags Work
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.
Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
Continued
41
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
42 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
■ When front airbags should not deploy
Safe Driving
42
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: Seat belts, and in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags,
and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags
could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a
rollover.
■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
43 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
■ Advanced Airbags
1Advanced Airbags
Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor
If the seat is too far forward, the airbag
inflates with less force, regardless of the
severity of the impact.
The passenger’s advanced front airbag system
has weight sensors.
Passenger’s
Seat
Weight
Sensors
Although we recommend against carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the sensors
detect the weight of a child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically
turn off the passenger’s front airbag.
If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position
sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag
will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the
driver’s seating position.
For both advanced front airbags to work properly:
• Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
• Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
• Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
• All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
• Do not place any cover over the passenger’s side
dashboard.
Safe Driving
Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag
related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver’s advanced front airbag system
includes a seat position sensor.
Make sure the floor mat behind the front passenger's
seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly
placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag
sensors.
2 Floor Mats P. 489
43
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
44 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAirbagsuDriver’s Knee Airbag
Driver’s Knee Airbag
The driver’s knee SRS airbag inflates in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help
keep the driver in the proper position and to help maximize the benefit provided by
the vehicles other safety features.
Safe Driving
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbag is designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary
restraint system.
■ Housing Locations
The driver’s knee airbag is housed under the
steering column for the driver.
The airbag is marked SRS AIRBAG.
Housing
Location
■ Operation
When
inflated
When the driver’s front airbag inflates, the
driver’s knee airbag also inflates.
Even if the collision is not severe enough to
deploy the front airbag, the knee airbag may
inflate alone.
Knee
Airbag
44
1Driver’s Knee Airbag
Do not attach accessories on or near the driver’s knee
airbag. They can interfere with the proper operation
of the airbag, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
45 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAirbagsuDriver’s Knee Airbag
■ When driver’s knee airbag may not deploy, even though exterior damage
Safe Driving
■ When driver’s knee airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
45
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
46 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front passenger
during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
Safe Driving
■ Housing Locations
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seatbacks.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
Housing
Location
■ Operation
When
inflated
Side
Airbag
46
When the sensors detect a moderate-tosevere side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.
1Side Airbags
Make sure you and your front seat passenger always
sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can
prevent the airbag from deploying properly and
increases your risk of serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the airbag
deploys even if there is no passenger’s in the
passenger seat.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
47 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the
far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed
most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been
needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
Safe Driving
■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.
47
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
48 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Safe Driving
The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer
seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags
equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly
rollover crashes.
■ Housing Locations
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.
1Side Curtain Airbags
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
The airbag on the passenger’s side will deploy, and
the seat belt tensioner will activate, even if there are
no passengers on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
■ Operation
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
48
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
49 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Safe Driving
■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal
collision.
In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.
Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a
message appears on the multi-information display.
■ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
■ When the power mode is set to ON
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
3 WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
Continued
49
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
50 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
■ Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
U.S.
Canada
■ When the passenger airbag off
Safe Driving
indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the front passenger’s weight
sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the
weight of an infant or small child, on the seat.
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and
no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult
riding there, something may be interfering with the
weight sensors, such as:
• An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.
• A child seat or other object pressing against the
rear of the seat-back.
• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger’s seat.
• The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 52
50
an object on the seat or floor behind it.
• An object placed under the front passenger’s seat.
Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger’s front airbag will not deploy and
the indicator will not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
51 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care
Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.
Safe Driving
■ When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.
1Airbag Care
■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable the driver’s seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the
passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate
a person with disabilities, contact an Acura dealer. For U.S. vehicles, Acura Client
Relations at 800-382-2238 and for Canadian vehicles, Acura Client Services at 1866-78-ACURA.
51
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
52 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the
number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
Safe Driving
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
• An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
• A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver’s ability to safely
control the vehicle.
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.
52
1Protecting Child Passengers
3 WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear
seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws
restricting where children may ride.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
53 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers
• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
3 WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.
Safe Driving
• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.
1Protecting Child Passengers
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 65
53
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
54 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safety of Infants and Small Children
■ Protecting Infants
Safe Driving
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat maker’s weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is
at least one year old.
■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.
1Protecting Infants
3 WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
up to two years old if the child’s height and weight
are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag
system.
2 Airbags P. 37
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
54
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a
forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
55 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
■ Protecting Smaller Children
1Protecting Smaller Children
3 WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
Safe Driving
If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child
seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured
forward-facing child seat.
■ Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forwardfacing child seat in a rear seating position.
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.
Continued
55
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
56 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
■ Selecting a Child Seat
Safe Driving
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer’s use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual.
Proper installation is key to maximizing your child’s safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.
■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
56
1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
57 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
■ Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Safe Driving
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats.
A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of
connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.
Marks
Lower Anchors
Rigid Type
2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.
Continued
57
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
58 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Safe Driving
For your child’s safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat
that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.
Flexible Type
Tether
Strap
Hook
Anchor
58
3. Open the tether anchor cover behind the
head restraint.
4. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
between the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
59 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
■ Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
Safe Driving
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into
the retractor, then try to pull it out to make
sure the retractor is locked.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.
Continued
59
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
60 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
60
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
61 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
■ Adding Security with a Tether
A tether anchorage point is provided behind
each rear seating position. A child seat that is
installed with a seat belt and comes with a
tether can use the tether for additional
security.
Since a tether can provide additional security to the
lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend
using a tether whenever one is available.
Safe Driving
Tether Anchorage Points
1Adding Security with a Tether
1. Locate the appropriate tether anchorage
point and lift the cover.
Anchor
Cover
Outer Position
Tether
Strap
Hook
2. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
through the head restraint legs. Make sure
the strap is not twisted.
Anchor
Center Position
Tether
Strap
Hook
3. Secure the tether strap hook onto the
anchor.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
Anchor
61
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
62 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safety of Larger Children
■ Protecting Larger Children
Safe Driving
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.
■ Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■ Checklist
• Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child’s neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
62
1Safety of Larger Children
3 WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
63 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
■ Booster Seats
1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.
Safe Driving
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
a rear seating position. For the child’s safety,
check that the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.
■ Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.
■ Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.
1Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
3 WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.
63
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
64 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
Safe Driving
■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
• The exhaust system may have been damaged.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open,
open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the
mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked
vehicle with the engine running.
64
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
3 WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
65 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
Sun Visors
U.S. models
Safe Driving
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.
Canadian models
Dashboard
U.S. models only
Radiator Cap
65
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
66
66 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
67 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 68
Multi-Information Display Warning and
Information Messages...................... 86
Gauges and Multi-Information Display... 97
Gauges.............................................. 97
Multi-Information Display .................. 98
67
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
68 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Indicators
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
U.S.
Instrument Panel
Canada
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on when the brake fluid level
is low.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the brake system.
●
●
Comes on when you set the power
mode to ON, and goes off when the
engine starts.
Comes on when the engine oil
pressure is low.
●
●
Comes on while driving - Check the
brake fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator comes
on while driving P. 523
●
Comes on along with the ABS indicator
- Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On P. 523
(Red)
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
68
●
Explanation
Comes on while driving - Immediately
stop in a safe place.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Comes On P. 522
Message
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
69 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
●
●
Canada
Electric Parking
Brake Indicator
●
●
●
Electric Parking
Brake System
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on when the parking brake is
applied, and goes off when it is
released.
Comes on for about 15 seconds then
goes off when you pull the electric
parking brake switch with the power
mode in OFF.
Comes on for about 15 seconds then
goes off when you set the power mode
to OFF with the parking brake applied.
●
Blinks and the electric parking brake
system indicator comes on at the same
time - There is a problem with the electric
parking brake system. The parking brake
may not be set.
Comes on when you press the
electric parking brake switch without
depressing the brake pedal.
●
Depress the brake pedal to release the
parking brake.
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the electric parking brake system.
●
Message
Instrument Panel
U.S.
Explanation
2 Parking Brake P. 405
Comes on while driving - Avoid using the
parking brake and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
2 If the Electric Parking Brake System
Indicator Comes On P. 524
Continued
69
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
70 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
Automatic Brake
Hold System
Indicator
Instrument Panel
70
U.S.
Canada
●
●
Automatic Brake
Hold Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on when the automatic brake
hold system is on.
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on when the automatic brake
hold is activated.
Explanation
Message
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 408
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 408
—
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
71 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
●
●
Canada
Brake System
Indicator
(Amber)
●
●
Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
With this indicator on, your vehicle still has
normal braking ability.
Message
U.S.
Canada
Instrument Panel
U.S.
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with
a system related to braking other
than the conventional brake system.
Comes on if there is a problem with
hydraulic brake boost system.
Explanation
(Amber)
Continued
71
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
72 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
Instrument Panel
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
●
●
Comes on when you set the power
mode to ON, and goes off either
when the engine starts or after
several seconds if the engine did not
start. If “readiness codes” have not
been set, it blinks five times before it
goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the emissions control system.
Blinks when a misfire in the engine’s
cylinders is detected.
Explanation
●
Readiness codes are part of the on board
diagnostics for the emissions control
systems.
●
Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place
where there are no flammable objects. Stop
the engine for 10 minutes or more, and
wait for it to cool down. Then, take the
vehicle to a dealer.
Message
2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 541
●
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes On or Blinks P. 523
●
Charging System
Indicator
Shift Lever
Position Indicator
Transmission
Indicator
72
●
Comes on when you set the power
mode to ON, and goes off when the
engine starts.
Comes on when the battery is not
charging.
●
Indicates the current shift lever
position.
●
Blinks if the transmission system has
a problem.
●
Comes on while driving - Turn off the
climate control system and rear defogger in
order to reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator
Comes On P. 522
2 Shifting P. 355
●
Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts
and acceleration and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
—
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
73 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
M (sequential
shift mode)
Indicator/Gear
Position Indicator
On/Blinking
●
●
Seat Belt
Reminder
Indicator
●
●
Low Fuel
Indicator
●
Comes on when the manual
sequential shift mode is applied.
2 Sequential Shift Mode P. 357
Comes on and the beeper sounds if
you are not wearing a seat belt when
you set the power mode to ON.
If the front passenger is not wearing
a seat belt, the indicator comes on
about a few seconds later.
Blinks while driving if either you or
the front passenger has not fastened
a seat belt. The beeper sounds and
the indicator blinks at regular
intervals.
●
Comes on when the fuel reserve is
running low (approximately 2.8 U.S.
gal/10.5 Liter left).
Blinks if there is a problem with the
fuel gauge.
●
●
Message
—
Instrument Panel
●
Explanation
The beeper stops and the indicator goes off
when you and the front passenger fasten
their seat belts.
Stays on after you or the front
passenger has fastened the seat belt - A
detection error may have occurred in the
sensor. Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 31
●
Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as
possible.
Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Continued
73
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
74 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
●
Instrument Panel
●
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
●
●
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
System Indicator
74
●
Explanation
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
If it comes on at any other time,
there is a problem with the ABS.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. With this indicator on,
your vehicle still has normal braking ability
but no anti-lock function.
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on if a problem with any of
the following is detected:
- Supplemental restraint system
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner
●
Stays on constantly or does not come on
at all - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Comes on when you set the power
mode to ON, and goes off when the
engine starts.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the EPS system.
●
Stays on constantly or does not come on
at all - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 410
2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System Indicator Comes On P. 524
Message
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
75 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
●
●
●
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®) OFF
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on when you deactivate
VSA®.
●
Message
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka
Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
System P. 396
2 VSA® OFF Button P. 397
Instrument Panel
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®)
System Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Blinks when VSA® is active.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the VSA® system or hill start assist
system.
Explanation
—
Continued
75
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
76 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
●
Instrument Panel
Low Tire
Pressure/TPMS
Indicator
●
System Message
Indicator
76
●
* Not available on all models
●
Explanation
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON.
Comes on if the tire pressure of any
of the tires becomes significantly
low.
Blinks for about one minute, and
then stays on if there is a problem
with the TPMS, or when a compact
spare tire * is temporarily installed.
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on along with a beep when a
problem is detected. A system
message on the multi-information
display appears at the same time.
●
●
●
●
Message
Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe
place, check tire pressures, and inflate the
tire(s) if necessary.
Blinks and remains on - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted
with a compact spare *, get your regular tire
repaired or replaced and put back on your
vehicle as soon as you can.
While the indicator is on, roll the right
selector wheel to see the message again.
Refer to the Indicators information in this
chapter when a system message appears on
the multi-information display. Take the
appropriate action for the message.
The multi-information display does not return
to the normal screen unless the warning is
canceled, or the right selector wheel is rolled.
—
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
77 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
Turn Signal
Indicators
●
●
Lights On
Indicator
●
●
Immobilizer
System Indicator
●
Security System
Alarm Indicator
—
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 467, 468, 469
Comes on when the high beam
headlights are on.
Comes on whenever the light switch
is on, or in AUTO when the exterior
lights are on.
●
Comes on briefly when you set the
power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on if the immobilizer system
cannot recognize the key
information.
●
●
●
●
Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn
signal light bulb has blown. Change the
bulb immediately.
Message
—
—
If you set the power mode to ACCESSORY
or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) while the exterior
lights are on, a chime sounds when the
driver’s door is opened.
—
Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Set
the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK),
then select the ON mode again.
Repeatedly blinks - The system may be
malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add
other devices to it. Electrical problems can
occur.
—
Instrument Panel
High Beam
Indicator
●
Blinks when you operate the turn
signal lever.
Blink along with all turn signals when
you press the hazard warning
button.
Explanation
Blinks when the security system
alarm has been set.
2 Security System Alarm P. 131
—
Indicator
Continued
77
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
78 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
Instrument Panel
Keyless Access
System Indicator
●
CRUISE MAIN
Indicator *
●
Comes on when you press the
CRUISE button.
CRUISE
CONTROL
Indicator *
●
Comes on if you have set a speed for
cruise control.
●
Precision AllWheel SteerTM (PAWS®) System
Indicator
●
●
SPORT Mode
Indicator
78
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on as soon as a problem is
detected in the keyless access system
or keyless starting system.
* Not available on all models
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
If it comes on at any other time, there
is a problem with the Precision AllWheel SteerTM (P-AWS®) system.
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on when you press the
SPORT button.
Explanation
●
●
●
Message
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Cruise Control * P. 360
—
2 Cruise Control * P. 360
—
Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
The system may limit the vehicle speed to
50 mph (80 km/h) or less.
2 SPORT Mode P. 359
—
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
79 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
●
●
Forward Collision
Warning (FCW)
Indicator *
Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
Comes on when you have
customized FCW to turn off.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the FCW system.
●
Stays on constantly without FCW off Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Comes on when the FCW system
shuts itself off.
●
Stays on - The temperature inside the FCW
system is too high. The system activates
when the temperature inside the system
cools down.
Message
Instrument Panel
●
Explanation
2 Automatic shutoff P. 379
●
●
Stays on - The area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft
cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
indicator and message come back on after
you cleaned the area around the camera.
2 Automatic shutoff P. 379
* Not available on all models
Continued
79
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
80 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
●
Instrument Panel
●
Explanation
Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the LDW system.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Comes on when the LDW system
shuts itself off.
●
Stays on - The temperature inside the LDW
camera is too high.
Use the climate control system to cool down
the camera.
The system activates when the temperature
inside the camera cools down.
Lane Departure
Warning (LDW)
Indicator *
2 Lane Departure Warning Camera (LDW
Camera) P. 382
●
●
Stays on - The area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft
cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
indicator and message come back on after
you cleaned the area around the camera.
2 Lane Departure Warning Camera (LDW
Camera) P. 382
80
* Not available on all models
Message
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
81 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the RDM system.
●
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Comes on when the RDM system
shuts itself off.
●
Stays on - The temperature inside the
camera is too high.
Use the climate control system to cool down
the camera.
The system activates when the temperature
inside the camera cools down.
Road Departure
Mitigation (RDM)
Indicator *
Message
Instrument Panel
●
Explanation
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 363
●
●
Stays on - The area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft
cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
indicator and message come back on after
you cleaned the area around the camera.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 363
* Not available on all models
Continued
81
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
82 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
●
Instrument Panel
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
Indicator
(Amber) *
●
●
●
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
Indicator (Green) *
Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with
ACC with LSF.
●
Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Comes on if anything covers the
radar sensor cover and prevents the
sensor from detecting a vehicle in
front.
May come on when driving in bad
weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)
ACC with LSF has been automatically
canceled.
●
When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your
vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt
using a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dear if the
indicator does not go off even after you
clean the sensor cover.
●
Comes on when you press the MAIN
button.
●
Comes on if the temperature inside
the camera is too high.
ACC with LSF has been automatically
canceled.
●
Explanation
●
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow (LSF) * P. 365
●
●
Use the climate control system to cool down
the camera.
Goes off - The camera has been cooled
down. Pressing the MAIN button can
resume the system.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 363
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow (LSF) * P. 365
82
* Not available on all models
Message
—
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
83 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
●
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the LKAS.
●
Comes on when you press the MAIN
button.
●
Comes on if the temperature inside
the camera is too high.
The LKAS has been automatically
canceled.
●
Explanation
●
●
Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(Green) *
—
Use the climate control system to cool down
the camera.
Goes off - The camera has been cooled
down. Pressing the LKAS button can
resume the system.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 363
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *
P. 389
●
●
* Not available on all models
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *
P. 389
●
Message
Instrument Panel
Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(Amber) *
On/Blinking
Comes on when the area around the
camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and
wipe it off with a soft cloth.
May come on when driving in bad
weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
indicator and message come back on after
you cleaned the area around the camera.
Continued
83
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
84 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
●
Instrument Panel
Blind Spot
Information (BSI)
Indicator *
Collision
Mitigation
Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM)
Indicator *
84
* Not available on all models
●
Explanation
Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
Stays on while BSI is turned off.
Comes on when mud, snow, or ice
accumulates in the vicinity of sensor.
—
●
Comes on while driving - Remove
the obstacle in the vicinity of sensor.
2 Blind Spot Information (BSI)
System * P. 399
●
Comes on if there is a problem with
the system.
●
Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
Comes on when you deactivate the
CMBSTM. A multi-information display
message appears for five seconds.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the CMBSTM.
●
Stays on constantly without the
CMBSTM off - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
●
●
2 Collision Mitigation Braking
SystemTM (CMBSTM) * P. 412
Message
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
85 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
Explanation
Comes on when the CMBS
shuts itself off.
TM
system
●
Stays on - The area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle
in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft
cloth.
Collision
Mitigation
Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM)
Indicator *
●
When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your
vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt
using a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
message does not disappear even after you
clean the sensor cover.
Instrument Panel
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 363
●
Message
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) * P. 412
●
Stays on - The temperature inside the
camera is too high. Use the climate control
system to cool down the camera. The
system activates when the temperature
inside the camera cools down.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 363
* Not available on all models
85
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
86 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
The following messages appear only on the multi-information display. Roll the right selector wheel to see the message again with the
system message indicator on.
Message
Condition
Explanation
Appears if any door or the trunk is not completely closed.
Appears if any door or the trunk is opened while driving.
The beeper sounds.
●
Goes off when all doors and the trunk are closed.
●
Appears if there is a problem a problem with the epretensioner system *.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Appears when the washer fluid is low.
●
Refill the washer fluid.
●
●
Instrument Panel
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 465
●
●
●
86
Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due soon.
Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and
Maintenance Past Due follow.
Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets
abnormally high.
* Not available on all models
2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the MultiInformation Display P. 451
2 Overheating P. 520
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
87 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Explanation
Appears when the transmission fluid temperature is too
high.
●
Stop in a safe place in (P . Let the engine idle until the
message disappears.
●
Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on the
battery.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Appears along with the battery charging system indicator
when the battery is not charging.
●
●
2 Checking the Battery P. 484
Turn off the climate control system and rear defogger to
reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 522
U.S.
●
Appears when the starter system has a problem.
●
As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while
depressing the brake pedal and manually start the engine.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Appears if the keyless access remote battery is too weak
to start the engine or the key is not within operating
range to start the engine.
A beeper sounds six times.
●
Bring the keyless access remote in front of the ENGINE
START/STOP button to be touched with.
Instrument Panel
●
Canada
2 If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak P. 514
Continued
87
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
88 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Instrument Panel
●
Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the power
mode is in ACCESSORY.
●
Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
Explanation
●
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice with your
foot off the brake pedal to change the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
—
●
Appears when you close the door with the power mode in
ON without the keyless access remote inside the vehicle.
●
Disappears when you bring the keyless access remote
back inside the vehicle and close the door.
2 Keyless Access Remote Reminder P. 139
●
●
●
88
Appears when the keyless access remote battery becomes
weak.
●
Appears three seconds after you bring the keyless access
remote in front of the ENGINE START/STOP button
when To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button
appears. To Start Engine: Brake + Push appears
sequentially.
●
Appears when you set the power mode to ACCESSORY or
ON.
Replace the battery as soon as possible.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 485
Unless you bring the keyless access remote in front of the
ENGINE START/STOP button, this message does not
appear.
2 If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak P. 514
2 Starting the Engine P. 348
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
89 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Explanation
Appears if you press the ENGINE START/STOP button to
turn the engine off without the shift lever in (P .
●
Move the shift lever to (P . The power mode changes to
VEHICLE OFF.
●
Appears if there is a problem with the radiator system.
●
Drive slowly to prevent overheating and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
●
Appears when there is a problem with the headlights.
●
Appears while driving - The low beam headlights may
not be on. When conditions allow you to drive safety,
have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
●
Appears if the automatic brake hold is automatically
canceled while it is in operation.
●
Immediately depress the brake pedal.
●
Appears when the automatic brake hold system is turned
off.
Instrument Panel
●
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 408
Continued
89
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
90 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
●
Instrument Panel
●
●
●
Explanation
Appears when the automatic brake hold button is pressed
without wearing the driver’s seat belt.
●
Appears when the automatic brake hold button is pressed
without depressing the brake pedal while the automatic
brake hold is in operation.
●
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 408
Press the automatic brake hold button with the brake
pedal depressed.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 408
Appears when the parking brake is applied automatically
while it is in operation.
Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with a
vehicle in front of you.
Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 408
2 Parking Brake P. 405
●
Take the appropriate means to prevent a collision (apply
the brakes, change lanes, etc.)
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
P. 412
2 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) P. 378
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 365
90
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
91 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Models with parking sensor system
Message
Condition
●
Appears if there is a problem with the parking sensor
system.
Explanation
●
Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with
mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator(s) stays on even after
you clean the area, have the system checked by a dealer.
Message
Condition
●
Appears when your vehicle is too close to the traffic lane
lines. The beeper sounds.
Explanation
●
Take appropriate action to keep your vehicle within the
lane lines.
Instrument Panel
Models with lane departure warning system
2 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) P. 381
Continued
91
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
92 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Models with ACC with LSF
Message
Condition
●
●
You can resume the set speed after the condition that
caused ACC with LSF to cancel improves. Press the RES/
+/SET/– switch up.
Instrument Panel
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 365
●
●
●
●
92
Appears when ACC with LSF has been automatically
canceled.
Explanation
Appears when the distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead of you is too close while ACC with LSF
is in operation.
●
Appears when pressing the RES/+/SET/– switch down
while the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead of you is too close.
●
Appears when the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is automatically stopped by ACC with LSF.
●
Appears when pressing the RES/+/SET/– switch down
while the driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
●
* Not available on all models
ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 365
ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 365
ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 365
ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 365
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
93 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Models with ACC with LSF
Message
Condition
●
●
●
Appears when the shift lever is moved into any position
other than (D while ACC with LSF is in operation.
●
Appears when pressing the RES/+/SET/– switch down
while the shift lever is in any position other than (D .
●
Appears when the vehicle is stopped on a very steep
slope while ACC with LSF is in operation.
●
Appears when pressing the RES/+/SET/– switch down
while the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.
●
* Not available on all models
ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 365
ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 365
Instrument Panel
●
Explanation
ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 365
ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 365
Continued
93
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
94 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Models with ACC with LSF
Message
Condition
●
Instrument Panel
●
●
●
94
Explanation
Appears when the parking brake is applied
automatically while ACC with LSF is in operation.
●
Appears when pressing the RES/+/SET/– switch down
while the parking brake is applied.
●
Appears when pressing the RES/+/SET/– switch down
while the vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is
depressed.
●
Appears if ACC with LSF is canceled while your vehicle
is automatically stopped by ACC with LSF.
●
* Not available on all models
ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 365
2 Parking Brake P. 405
ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 365
2 Parking Brake P. 405
ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 365
Immediately depress the brake pedal.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
95 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Models with LKAS
Message
Condition
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
●
Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected
line. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly.
Explanation
●
●
Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
The color of either line changes from white to amber as
the vehicle gets closer to that side of the lane line.
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
●
Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected
line.
●
●
2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System * P. 385
When you selected Warning Only
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is
drifting out of a detected line.
Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
The color of either line changes from white to amber as
the vehicle gets closer to that side of the lane line.
●
When you selected Normal or Wide
You can change the setting for the road departure
mitigation system. Normal, Wide, and Warning Only
can be selected.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is
drifting out of a detected line. The system also steers
the vehicle to help you remain within your driving
lane.
●
Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper
sounds simultaneously.
●
Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS.
●
Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS
button is pressed, but there is a problem with a system
related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels automatically.
The beeper sounds simultaneously.
●
If any other system indicators come on, such as the
VSA®, ABS and brake system, take appropriate action.
* Not available on all models
Instrument Panel
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * P. 389
2 Indicators P. 68
Continued
95
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
96 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Models with two-way keyless access remote
Message
Condition
●
Appears when you unlock and open the driver’s door
while the engine is running by two-way keyless access
remote.
Instrument Panel
96
Explanation
2 Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback * P. 350
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
97 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Gauges and Multi-Information Display
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators.
They are displayed when the power mode is in ON.
■ Speedometer
Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h.
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.
■ Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
1Fuel Gauge
Instrument Panel
■ Tachometer
NOTICE
You should refuel when the needle approaches E .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.
■ Temperature Gauge
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.
1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE
Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the
upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull
safely to the side of the road and allow engine
temperature to return to normal.
2 Overheating P. 520
97
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
98 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Multi-Information Display
The multi-information display shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature
indicator, and other gauges. It also displays important messages such as warnings
and other helpful information.
■ Switching the Display
Instrument Panel
■ Main displays
Roll the right selector wheel to change the display.
Blank Screen
Right Selector Wheel
98
* Not available on all models
Vehicle Settings
Instant Fuel Economy/
Average Fuel Economy
Tire Pressure for
Each Tire
Range
Engine Oil Life
Elapsed Time
Average Speed
Turn-by-Turn
Directions
This message
shows when ACC
with LSF * and the
LKAS * are off.
Compass
Current Mode for
ACC with LSF * and
the LKAS *
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
99 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
■ Lower displays
Press the TRIP button to change the display.
TRIP
TRIP
Odometer
Instrument Panel
Outside temperature
TRIP
Trip A
Trip B
TRIP Button
Continued
99
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
100 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
■ Odometer
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.
■ Trip Meter
Instrument Panel
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A
and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the TRIP button.
■ Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the TRIP button. The trip meter
is reset to 0.0.
■ Outside Temperature
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
■ Adjusting the outside temperature display
Adjust the temperature reading up to ± 5°F (U.S.) or ± 3°C (Canada) if the
temperature reading seems incorrect.
1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
Use the multi-information display’s customized
features to correct the temperature.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
■ Average Fuel Economy
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100
km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the
average fuel economy is also reset.
100
1Average Fuel Economy
You can change when to reset the average fuel
economy.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
101 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
■ Instant Fuel Economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).
■ Range
■ Elapsed Time
1Elapsed Time
You can change when to reset the elapsed time.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
■ Average Speed
Instrument Panel
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.
1Average Speed
Shows the average speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada) since Trip A or Trip B was
reset.
You can change when to reset the average speed.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
■ Current Mode for ACC with LSF
Models with ACC with LSF
Shows the current mode for ACC with LSF.
2 To Switch ACC with LSF to Cruise Control P. 377
■ Turn-by-Turn Directions
1Turn-by-Turn Directions
Shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination linked with the
navigation system.
You can select whether the turn-by-turn display
comes on during the route guidance.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Continued
101
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
102 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
■ Engine Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 449
■ Tire Pressure Monitor
Instrument Panel
102
Shows each tire’s pressure.
2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) P. 401
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
103 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
■ Customized Features
1Customized Features
Use the multi-information display to customize certain features.
Multi-information
Display: Goes to
Vehicle Settings.
Right Selector Wheel
Roll: Changes the
customize menus and
items.
Push: Enter the selected
item.
Continued
Customization is possible when you see the driver’s
ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) on the screen.
The driver’s ID indicates which remote transmitter
you have used to unlock the driver’s door. The
customized settings are recalled every time you
unlock the driver’s door with that remote.
Instrument Panel
■ How to customize
Select the Vehicle Settings screen by rolling the right selector wheel while the
power mode is in ON, and the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Push the right selector wheel.
To customize other features, roll the right selector
wheel.
2 List of customizable options P. 106
2 Example of customization settings P. 111
When you customize settings: Shift to (P .
Customizing is also available from the audio/
information screen.
You cannot have Vehicle Settings displayed on the
multi-information display while the audio/
information screen shows the same menu.
2 Customized Features P. 265
103
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
104 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
■ Customization flow
Roll the right selector wheel to select Vehicle Settings and push the right selector wheel.
Vehicle Settings
Push
Driver Assist System Setup
Push
Instrument Panel
Roll
Meter Setup
Push
Roll
Roll
Push
Forward Collision Warning Distance
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep *
ACC Display Speed Unit *
Roll
Road Departure Mitigation Setting *
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep *
Blind Spot Info *
Roll
Driving Position Setup
Push
Language Selection
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Turn by Turn Display
Memory Position Link
Roll
Roll
Auto Tilt & Telescopic
Auto Seatbelt Tension *
Keyless Access Setup
Push
Roll
Roll
104
* Not available on all models
Door Unlock Mode
Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep
Remote Start System On/Off *
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
105 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Roll
Lighting Setup
Push
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Instrument Panel
Roll
Roll
Auto Light Sensitivity
Door Setup
Push
Roll
Push
Roll
Roll
Wiper Setup
Roll
Maintenance Info.
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Auto Folding Door Mirror *
Wiper Action *
Push
Roll
Front Wiper Action *
Roll
Default All
Roll
Exit
* Not available on all models
Continued
105
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
106 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
■ List of customizable options
Setup Group
Instrument Panel
Driver Assist
System
Setup
Customizable Features
Description
Selectable Settings
Forward Collision
Warning Distance
Changes at which distance FCW * or CMBSTM* alerts, or
turns FCW * on and off.
Long/Normal*1/Short/Off
ACC Forward Vehicle
Detect Beep *
Causes the system to beep when the system detects a vehicle,
or when the vehicle goes out of the ACC with LSF range.
On/Off*1
ACC Display Speed Unit *
Changes the speed unit for ACC with LSF on the multiinformation display.
mph*1/km/h
(U.S.)
mph/km/h*1
(Canada)
Road Departure
Mitigation Setting *
Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation
system.
Normal*1/Wide/Warning
Only
Lane Keeping Assist
Suspend Beep *
Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended.
On/Off*1
Blind Spot Info *
Changes the setting for the blind spot information.
Audible And Visual
Alert*1/Visual Alert/Off
*1:Default Setting
106
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
107 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Setup Group
Customizable Features
Selectable Settings
English*1/French/Spanish
Adjust Outside Temp.
Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C
(Canada)
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,
average fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed
time A.
When Refueled/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,
average fuel economy B, average speed B, and elapsed
time B.
When Refueled/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1
Turn by Turn Display
Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes on
during the route guidance.
On*1/Off
Instrument Panel
Changes the displayed language.
Language Selection
Meter Setup
Description
*1:Default Setting
Continued
107
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
108 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Setup Group
Instrument Panel
Driving
Position
Setup
Keyless
Access
Setup
Lighting
Setup
Customizable Features
Selectable Settings
Memory Position Link
Turns the driving position memory system on and
off.
On*1/Off
Auto Tilt and Telescopic
Moves the steering wheel fully up when you get in/
get out of the vehicle.
On*1/Off
Auto Seatbelt Tension *
Turns the auto seatbelt tension setting for the seat
belt e-pretensioner on and off.
On*1/Off
Door Unlock Mode
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.
Driver Door Only*1/All Doors
Keyless Access Light
Flash
Causes some exterior lights to flash when you
unlock/lock the doors.
On*1/Off
Keyless Access Beep
Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock
the doors.
On*1/Off
Remote Start System On/
Off *
Turns the remote engine start feature on and off.
On*1/Off
Interior Light Dimming
Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on
after you close the doors.
60sec/30sec*1/15sec
Headlight Auto Off
Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay
on after you close the driver’s door.
60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec
Auto Light Sensitivity
Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.
Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min
*1:Default Setting
108
Description
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
109 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Setup Group
Customizable Features
Selectable Settings
With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift
from P/Off
Auto Door Unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically unlock.
All Doors When Driver’s
Door Opens*1/All Doors
When Shifted To Park/All
Doors When Ignition
Switched Off/Off
Key And Remote Unlock
Mode
Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock
on the first operation of the remote or built-in key.
Driver Door*1/ All Doors
Keyless Lock Answer
Back
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
On*1/Off
Security Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and
the security system to set after you unlock the
vehicle without opening any door.
90sec/60sec/30sec*1
Auto Folding Door
Mirror *
Changes how you can fold the door mirrors.
Auto Fold With Keyless*1/
Manual Only
Instrument Panel
Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically lock.
Auto Door Lock
Door Setup
Description
*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models
Continued
109
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
110 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Setup Group
Customizable Features
Description
Selectable Settings
Wiper Action *
Changes the setting for the automatic intermittent
wipers in the AUTO position.
Rain Sensing*1/Intermittent/
Speed Sensitive
Front Wiper Action *
Changes the setting for the wipers in the INT
position.
Speed Sensitive*1/
Intermittent
Maintenance Reset
Resets/Cancels the engine oil life display when you
have performed the maintenance service.
Cancel/Reset
Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as
default.
Cancel/Set
Wiper Setup
Instrument Panel
Maintenance
Info.
Default All
*1:Default Setting
110
* Not available on all models
—
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
111 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
■ Example of customization settings
The steps for changing the “Trip A” Reset Timing setting to When Refueled are
shown below. The default setting for “Trip A” Reset Timing is Manually Reset.
1. Roll the right selector wheel to select
Vehicle Settings, then push the right
selector wheel.
Instrument Panel
2. Roll the right selector wheel until Meter
Setup appears on the display.
3. Push the right selector wheel.
u Language Selection appears first on
the display.
Continued
111
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
112 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
4. Roll the right selector wheel until “Trip A”
Reset Timing appears on the display, then
push the right selector wheel.
u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you
can select When Refueled, IGN Off,
Manually Reset, or Exit.
5. Roll the right selector wheel and select
When Refueled, then push the right
selector wheel.
u The When Refueled Setup screen
appears, then the display returns to the
customization menu screen.
6. Roll the right selector wheel until Exit
appears on the display, then push the right
selector wheel.
7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the
normal screen.
112
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
113 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Clock .................................................. 114
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................. 115
Low Keyless Access Remote Signal
Strength......................................... 117
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside .......................................... 118
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside ............................................. 124
Childproof Door Locks ..................... 126
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 127
Opening and Closing the Trunk....... 128
Security System ................................ 131
Immobilizer System .......................... 131
Security System Alarm...................... 131
Opening and Closing the Windows .... 134
Opening and Closing the Moonroof ....... 136
Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel
ENGINE START/STOP Button............. 137
Turn Signals ..................................... 140
Light Switches.................................. 141
Daytime Running Lights ................... 144
Wipers and Washers ........................ 145
Brightness Control ........................... 148
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button...149
Driving Position Memory System ...... 150
Adjusting the Steering Wheel........... 152
Adjusting the Mirrors....................... 153
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 153
Power Door Mirrors ......................... 154
Adjusting the Seats .......................... 156
Adjusting the Seat Positions............. 156
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience
Items ................................................ 163
Interior Lights .................................. 163
Interior Convenience Items .............. 165
Climate Control System ................... 181
Using Automatic Climate Control .... 181
Automatic Climate Control Sensors......190
113
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
114 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Clock
Adjusting the Clock
The clock is automatically updated through the navigation system, so the time does
not need to be adjusted.
You can also adjust the time manually in the audio/information screen, with the
power mode in ON.
■ Adjusting the Time
■ Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen
Controls
System settings
Clock/Wallpaper Type
Hour
Clock Display
114
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Clock tab.
4. Rotate
to select Clock Adjustment,
then press .
5. Rotate
to change hour, then press .
6. Rotate
to change minute, then press
.
1Adjusting the Clock
These indications are used to show how to operate
the interface dial.
Rotate
to select.
Press
to enter.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 265
You can turn the clock display in the audio/
information screen on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 265
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
115 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following keys:
1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 131
■ Keys
■ Keyless access remote
Models without two-way keyless
access remote
Models with two-way keyless
access remote
The keys contain precision electronics.
Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to
the electronics:
• Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
• Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
• Keep the keys away from liquids.
• Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the keyless access system may not
work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.
Controls
Use the keyless access remote to start and
stop the engine, to lock and unlock the doors
and to open the trunk. You can also use the
keyless access system to lock and unlock the
doors and trunk.
Models with two-way keyless access remote
You can remotely start the engine using the two-way
keyless access remote.
2 Remote Engine Start with Vehicle
Feedback * P. 350
* Not available on all models
Continued
115
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
116 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions
Models without two-way keyless
access remote
Release Knob
Built-in Key
Controls
Models with two-way keyless
access remote
Release Knob
Built-in Key
116
The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the
doors when the keyless access remote battery
becomes weak and the power door lock/
unlock operation is disabled.
To remove the built-in key, pull it out while
sliding the release knob. To reinstall the builtin key, push the built-in key into the keyless
access remote until it clicks.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
117 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Keyless Access Remote Signal Strength
■ Key Number Tag
1Key Number Tag
Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.
Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.
Controls
Low Keyless Access Remote Signal Strength
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the keyless access remote when locking/
unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or to start the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or starting
the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:
• Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
• You are carrying the keyless access remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
• A metallic object is touching or covering the keyless access remote.
1Low Keyless Access Remote Signal Strength
Communication between the keyless access remote
and the vehicle consumes the keyless access remote’s
battery.
The keyless access remote battery lasts about two
years. This changes by how often you use the remote.
The battery is consumed whenever the keyless access
remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
personal computers.
117
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
118 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■ Using the Remote Transmitter
LED
Unlock
Button
■ Locking the doors
Lock
Button
Controls
Press the lock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors
lock, and the security system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
u The beeper sounds and verifies the
security system is set.
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote
transmitter or keyless access system only when the
power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
the doors will automatically relock.
You can change the relock timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
LED*1
Unlock
Button
Lock
Button
If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior lights come on when you press
the unlock button.
No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30
seconds.
Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off
immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 163
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is
open.
*1: Checking Door Lock Status * P. 123
118
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
119 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■ Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the driver’s door unlocks.
Twice:
u The remaining doors unlock.
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 485
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
Controls
Continued
119
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
120 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■ Using the Keyless Access System
Models with door lock buttons
on all doors
Controls
When you carry the keyless access remote,
you can lock/unlock the doors and open the
trunk.
You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius
of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door
handle. You can open the trunk within about
32 inches (80 cm) radius from the trunk
release button.
Models with door lock buttons
on the front doors
1Using the Keyless Access System
• Do not leave the keyless access remote in the
vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.
• Even if you are not carrying the keyless access
•
•
•
•
•
■ Locking the vehicle
Door Lock Button
Press the door lock button on the front or
rear * door.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all the doors lock; and the
security system sets.
remote, you can lock/unlock the doors while
someone else with the remote is within range.
The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if
the keyless access remote is within range.
If you grip a front or rear * door handle wearing
gloves, the door sensor may be slow to respond or
may not respond by unlocking the doors.
The door may not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
pulling the handle.
Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may
not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the
keyless access remote if it is above or below the
outside handle.
The keyless access remote may not operate if it is
too close to the door and door glass.
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 485
You can customize the door lock mode and keyless
lock acknowledgement setting.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
120
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
121 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■ Unlocking the vehicle
* Not available on all models
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle, the doors will automatically
relock.
2 Using the Trunk Release Button P. 128
The light flash, beep and unlock settings can be
customized using the audio/information screen or
multi-information display.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
Continued
When you go into the front side of the keyless access
system working range with all the doors locked, the
front and rear * door outer handle ambient lights
come on for 30 seconds.
The lights do not come on if you have previously
stayed within the range for more than five minutes,
or the doors have been locked for a few days.
The feature activates again after you drive the
vehicle, then lock the doors.
Controls
Trunk
Release
Button
1Using the Keyless Access System
Grab the driver’s door handle:
u The driver’s door unlocks.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the front passenger’s or rear * door
handle:
u All the doors unlock.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Press the trunk release button:
u The trunk unlocks and opens.
u The beeper sounds.
121
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
122 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■ Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
Fully insert the key and turn it.
Lock
When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all the
other doors lock at the same time. When unlocking,
the driver’s door unlocks first. Turn the key a second
time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining
doors.
If you unlock the doors with the key, the alarm goes
off when you open the hood or move the shift lever
out of (P before the power mode is set to ON.
Unlock
Controls
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
■ Locking a Door Without Using a Key
■ Locking the front doors
Push the lock tab forward a or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b, and close the door.
■ Locking the rear doors
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
■ Lockout prevention system
The doors cannot be locked when the keyless access remote is inside the vehicle, and
any door is open.
122
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors
lock at the same time.
Make sure you have the key in your hand before
locking the door to prevent it from being locked in
the vehicle.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
123 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■ Checking Door Lock Status *
Red
Green
Amber
You can remotely check if your vehicle’s doors
are all locked or any are unlocked using the
keyless access remote from extended
distances.
Lock Button
1Checking Door Lock Status *
Operate the remote in an open space. If there are
buildings or other obstacles between your vehicle
and the remote, the remote may not work even
within the operable range. However, the range of
unlock, all doors, and panic functions are the same as
the standard keyless access remote.
2 Using the Remote Transmitter P. 118
Controls
When checking the door lock status, you can also
start or stop the engine.
2 Remote Engine Start with Vehicle
Feedback * P. 350
Press the lock button, the Amber (LEFT) LED blinks once. Then after three seconds
one of the following feedback will come:
• Green (center) comes on: Acknowledges that the doors are locked.
• Red (right) comes on: Acknowledges that doors are not locked, or any door is not
completely closed.
• Red (right) blinks three times: The remote does not receive the door lock status
from the vehicle.
* Not available on all models
123
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
124 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
■ Using the Lock Tab
Lock Tab
To Lock
1Using the Lock Tab
■ Locking a door
Push the lock tab forward.
■ Unlocking a door
To Unlock
Controls
124
Pull the lock tab rearward.
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, all the other doors lock at the same
time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, only the driver’s door will unlock.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
125 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
■ Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
Pull the front door inner handle.
u The door unlocks and opens in one
motion.
The inner front door handles are designed to allow
front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.
However this feature requires that front seat
occupants never pull a front door inner handle while
the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where
childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 126
Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other
doors.
Controls
Inner Handle
To avoid all the doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock,
then lock again before opening the door.
u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to be
unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using
the multi-information display or audio/information screen.
Continued
125
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
126 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks
■ Using the Master Door Lock Switch
Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock all doors.
To Lock
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock either front door using the
master door lock switch, all the other doors lock/
unlock at the same time.
To Unlock
Controls
Master Door Lock Switch
Childproof Door Locks
1Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock tab.
■ Setting the Childproof Door Locks
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.
■ When opening the door
Unlock
Lock
126
Open the door using the outside door handle.
To open the door from the inside when the
childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
127 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks all doors and unlocks the driver’s door automatically when a
certain condition is met.
■ Auto Door Locking
■ Drive lock mode
All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the audio/
information screen or multi-information display.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
■ Auto Door Unlocking
Controls
■ Driver’s door open mode
All doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.
127
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
128 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Opening and Closing the Trunk
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk
■ Opening the trunk
Open the trunk all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.
■ Closing the trunk
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:
u Avoid possible damage.
u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 64
Controls
Using the Trunk Release Button
Pressing the trunk release button on the
driver’s door.
2 When You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 533
Trunk Release Button
128
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
129 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Remote Transmitter
Trunk
Release
Button
Push up the release button on the trunk lid
after the doors are unlocked.
2 When You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 533
1Using the Trunk Release Button
• Do not leave the keyless access remote in the
vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.
• Even if you are not carrying the keyless access
Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the
trunk if you carry the keyless access remote.
u The beeper sounds.
Trunk
Release
Button
Controls
Using the Remote Transmitter
remote, you can unlock the trunk while someone
else with the remote is within range.
• Do not leave the keyless access remote inside the
trunk and close the lid. The beeper sounds and the
trunk cannot be closed.
Press the trunk release button for
approximately one second to unlock and open
the trunk.
Trunk
Release
Button
129
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
130 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuEmergency Trunk Opener
Emergency Trunk Opener
Lever
The trunk release lever allows you to open the
trunk from inside for your safety.
Pull the release lever in the direction of the
arrow.
Controls
130
1Emergency Trunk Opener
Parents should decide if their children should be
shown how to use this feature.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
131 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from
starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic
signals to verify the key.
Security System Alarm
NOTICE
Leaving the keyless access remote in the vehicle can
result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the key with you whenever you leave the
vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
1Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the trunk, hood or doors are forcibly
opened. The alarm does not go off if the trunk or doors are opened with the key,
remote transmitter or keyless access system.
Controls
Pay attention to the following when pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button:
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
• Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system with the keyless
access remote.
1Immobilizer System
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
minutes until the security system deactivates.
However, the alarm goes off when a door is opened with the key, then the shift
lever is moved out of (P or the hood is opened before the power mode is set to ON.
■ When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently and all of the exterior lights flash.
■ To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the remote transmitter or keyless access system. The
system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
Continued
131
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
132 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
■ Setting the security system alarm
Controls
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
• The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
• The hood and trunk are closed.
• All doors are locked from outside with the key, remote transmitter or keyless
access system.
■ When the security system alarm sets
The security system indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the blinking
interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system is set.
■ To cancel the security system alarm
The security system is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
transmitter, or you grab either front door * or any door * handle while carrying the
keyless access remote, or the power mode is set to ON. The security system indicator
goes off at the same time.
1Security System Alarm
Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
• Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
• Opening the trunk with the trunk release button on
the driver’s door or the emergency trunk opener.
• Moving the shift lever out of (P .
• Opening the hood with the hood release.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may go off
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the remote transmitter or
keyless access system.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add another
device to it.
132
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
133 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
■ Panic Mode
■ The panic button on the remote
Panic
Button
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
• Some exterior lights flash.
Controls
Panic
Button
■ Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter, or set the power mode to ON.
133
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
134 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Opening and Closing the Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON,
using the switches on the doors. The driver’s side switches can be used to open and
close all of the windows.
The power window lock button on the driver’s side must be switched off (not
pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than
the driver’s seat.
Controls
When the power window lock button is pushed in, you can only operate the driver’s
window. Turn the power window lock button on when children are in the vehicle.
■ Opening/Closing the Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
ON
OFF
Power Window
Lock Button
Driver’s
Window
Switch
Indicator
Front Passenger’s
Window Switch
Rear Passenger’s
Window Switches
134
■ Automatic operation
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
3 WARNING
Closing a power window on someone’s
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
Opening either front door cancels this function.
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it stops closing and reverse direction.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
■ Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
135 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
■ Opening the Windows and Moonroof with the Remote
To open: Press the unlock button twice
within 10 seconds and hold it down the
second time. If the windows stop midway,
repeat the procedure.
Unlock
Button
Close
Open
Controls
■ Opening/Closing the Windows/Moonroof with the Key
To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the
key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to
the central position, turn the key in the unlock
direction and hold it there.
To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.
Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the
central position, turn the key in the lock
direction and hold it there.
Release the key to stop the windows/
moonroof at the desired position. If you want
further adjustment, repeat the same
operation.
135
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
136 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
■ Opening/Closing the Moonroof
You can only operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch
in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
■ Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
Open
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
Controls
Close
Tilt
The moonroof will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
touch the switch briefly.
■ Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
■ Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.
136
1Opening/Closing the Moonroof
3 WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone’s hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
NOTICE
Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
137 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
ENGINE START/STOP Button
■ Changing the Power Mode
Indicator
1ENGINE START/STOP Button
ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range
Operating Range
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Indicator in the button is off. The power to all
electrical components is turned off.
ON
Indicator in the button is on. All electrical
components can be used.
Controls
ACCESSORY
Indicator in the button is on. Indicator in the
button blinks (from ON to ACCESSORY). Operate
the audio system and other accessories in this
position.
You can start the engine when the keyless access
remote is inside the vehicle.
The engine may also run if the keyless access remote
is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the
vehicle.
ON mode:
Indicator in the button is off, if the engine is running.
If the keyless access remote battery is weak, beeper
sounds and the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start
Button message appears on the multi-information
display.
2 If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is
Weak P. 514
Without depressing
the brake pedal
Press the button.
Press the button without the shift lever in (P .
Shift to (P then press the button.
Shift to (P .
Continued
137
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
138 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
■ Automatic Power Off
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P and the power
mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid the battery drain.
When in this mode, you cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or
the keyless access system.
Controls
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
■ Power Mode Reminder
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning
buzzer sounds.
138
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
139 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
■ Keyless Access Remote Reminder
Warning buzzers may sound from inside or/
and outside the vehicle to remind you that the
keyless access remote is out of the vehicle. If
the buzzer continues even after the remote is
put back inside, place it to be within its
operational range.
■ When the power mode is in
ACCESSORY
If the keyless access remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed, a
warning buzzer sounds from outside the
vehicle.
When the keyless access remote is within the
system’s operational range, and the driver’s door is
closed, the warning function cancels.
If the keyless access remote is taken out of the vehicle
after the engine has been started, you can no longer
change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or
restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is
in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
Removing the keyless access remote from the vehicle
through a window does not activate the warning
buzzer.
Controls
■ When the power mode is in ON
If the keyless access remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed,
warning buzzers sound from both inside and
outside the vehicle. A warning message on
the multi-information display notifies the
driver inside that the remote is out.
1Keyless Access Remote Reminder
Do not put the keyless access remote on the
dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the
warning buzzer to go off. Under some other
conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating
the remote, the warning buzzer may also go off even
if the remote is within the system’s operational
range.
139
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
140 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
Turn Signals
Right Turn
The turn signals can be used when the power
mode is in ON.
■ One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push up or down and release
the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals
and turn signal indicator blink three times.
Left Turn
Controls
140
This feature can be used when signaling for a
lane change.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
141 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
Light Switches
■ Manual Operation
High Beams
1Light Switches
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the power mode
setting.
■ Low beams
If you sense that the level of the headlights is
abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Turns on parking, side marker,
tail, and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and rear license plate
lights
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
return to low beams.
■ Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back, and release it.
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.
Controls
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 77
■ High beams
Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
with the lights on, a light on reminder chime will
sound when you open the driver’s door.
Your vehicle is equipped with the automatic
headlight adjusting system that automatically adjusts
the vertical angle of the headlights. If you find a
significant change in the vertical angle of the
headlights, there may be a problem with the system.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
■ Lights off
Turn the lever to OFF either when:
• The shift lever is in (P .
• The parking brake is applied.
To turn the lights on again, turn the lever to
OFF to cancel the lights off mode. Even if you
do not cancel the lights off mode, the lights
come on automatically when:
• The shift lever is moved out of (P .
• The parking brake is released.
• The vehicle starts to move.
Continued
141
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
142 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
■ Automatic Lighting Control
1Automatic Lighting Control
Automatic lighting control can be used when
the power mode is in ON.
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
When the light switch is in AUTO, the
headlights and other exterior lights will switch
on and off automatically depending on the
ambient brightness.
The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
work properly.
Controls
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
You can change the auto light sensitivity
setting.
Light Sensor
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
Models without automatic intermittent wipers
Light Sensor
142
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
143 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
■ Headlight Integration with Wipers *
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within
a certain intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.
■ Automatic Lighting Off Feature
If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) with the headlight switch on, but
do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the
switch is in the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver’s door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.
Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting
The exterior lights come on
when the ambient light is at
MAX
HIGH
MID
LOW
MIN
Bright
Dark
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
1Headlight Integration with Wipers *
Controls
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15
seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with
you, and close the driver's door.
1Automatic Lighting Control
This feature activates during the headlights are off in
AUTO.
The instrument panel brightness does not change
when the headlights come on.
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting
control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of
the number of wiper sweeps.
1Automatic Lighting Off Feature
You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
* Not available on all models
143
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
144 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights
Daytime Running Lights
The low beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following
conditions have been met:
• The power mode is in ON.
• The headlight switch is AUTO, or in
.
• The parking brake is released.
The low beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight switch
is turned on, or when the head light switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker
outside.
Controls
144
1Daytime Running Lights
U.S. models
The daytime running lights come on dimmer when
the headlight switch is in
than when it is in
AUTO. In AUTO, if the ambient brightness is dark,
the low beam headlights come on.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
145 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Wipers and Washers
The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the power mode is in ON.
Pull to
use
washer.
■ MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.
INT *: Low speed with
intermittent
AUTO *: Wiper speed varies
automatically
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.
■ AUTO *
2 Automatic Intermittent Wipers * P. 146
■ Adjusting wiper operation
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
delay.
Lower speed, fewer sweeps
Models without automatic intermittent wipers
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens.
When the vehicle starts moving, the wipers make a
single sweep.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s
shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become
the same.
All models
Higher speed, more sweeps
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
■ Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever, the wipers make
two or three more sweeps before stopping.
* Not available on all models
In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield, becoming stuck.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
them. Use the defroster to warm the windshield,
then turn the wipers on.
Controls
OFF
NOTICE
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
NOTICE
■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT *, LO, HI)
MIST
1Wipers and Washers
Continued
The wiper motor may stop motor operation
temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation
will return to normal within a few minutes, once the
circuit has returned to normal.
145
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
146 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
■ Automatic Intermittent Wipers *
1Wipers and Washers
When you push the lever down to AUTO, the
windshield wipers sweep once, and go into
the automatic mode.
Controls
Adjustment Ring
The wipers operate intermittently, at low
speed, or at high speed and stops in
accordance with the amount of rainfall the
rainfall sensor detects.
■ AUTO sensitivity adjustment
When in AUTO, you can also adjust the
rainfall sensor sensitivity using the adjustment
ring.
If the wipers stop operating due to any obstacle such
as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe
place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and set the power
mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then
remove the obstacle.
1Automatic Intermittent Wipers *
The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.
Rainfall Sensor
Sensor sensitivity
Low sensitivity:
Lower speed, fewer sweeps
High sensitivity:
Higher speed, more sweeps
146
* Not available on all models
Do not put the wiper lever in AUTO when cleaning
the windshield or driving through a car wash. If the
wiper lever is in AUTO, and the power mode is in ON,
the rainfall sensor may respond to your hand or car
wash liquids, and the wipers may operate
automatically.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
147 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
■ Headlight Washers *
Headlight
Washer
Button
1Headlight Washers *
Turn the headlights on and press the
headlight washer button to operate.
The headlight washers also operate when you
turn the windshield washers for the first time
after the power mode sets to ON.
The headlight washers use the same fluid reservoir as
the windshield washers.
Controls
* Not available on all models
147
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
148 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Brightness Control
(+ Button
(- Button
When the power mode is in ON, you can use
the (+ or (- button to adjust instrument
panel brightness.
To brighten: Press the (+ button.
To dim: Press the (- button.
Controls
You will hear a beep when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. The multiinformation display will return to its original
state several seconds after you adjust the
brightness.
■ Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the multiinformation display while you are adjusting it.
1Brightness Control
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
on.
When it is bright outside and the headlight
integration with the wiper is activated, the
instrument panel brightness does not change.
Pushing or rolling the right selector wheel changes to
a different display.
If you press the (+ button until the brightness display
is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels the
reduced instrument panel brightness when the
parking lights are on.
The brightness can be set differently for when the
exterior lights are on, and when they are off.
148
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
149 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door
mirror button to defog the rear window and
mirrors when the power mode is in ON.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to damage the heating wires and antenna
line.
It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
along the defogger heating wires and antenna line.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged.
Also, do not use the system for a long period when
the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,
making it difficult to start the engine.
Controls
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C) or below, they do not automatically
switch off.
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
149
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
150 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System
Driving Position Memory System
You can store two driver’s seat (except for power lumbar), steering wheel and door
mirror positions with the driving position memory system.
When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote transmitter, or keyless
access system, the seat and door mirrors adjust automatically to one of the two
preset positions.
The steering wheel will move to the stored position when you set the power mode
to ACCESSORY.
Controls
The multi-information display shows you which remote transmitter you used to
unlock the vehicle when you enter.
• DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.
• DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.
DRIVER 1
150
DRIVER 2
1Driving Position Memory System
Using the audio/information screen or multiinformation display, you can disable the automatic
seat, steering wheel and door mirrors adjustment
function.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
151 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System
■ Storing a Position in Memory
Memory Button 1
Memory Button 2
■ Recalling the Stored Position
Memory Buttons
1. Move the shift lever to (P .
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Press a memory button ( (1 or (2 ).
u You will hear the beep, and the indicator
light will blink.
After you press the SET button, the storing operation
will be canceled when:
• You do not press the memory button within five
seconds.
• You readjust the seat, the steering wheel or the
outside mirror position before the double-beep.
• You set the power mode to any position except
ON.
Controls
SET Button
1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the
driver’s seat, the steering wheel and the
door mirrors to the desired position.
2. Press the SET button.
u You will hear the beep, and the memory
button indicator light will blink.
3. Press memory button (1 or (2 within five
seconds of pressing the SET button.
u Once the seat, the steering wheel and
the outside mirror positions have been
memorized, the indicator light on the
button you pressed stays on.
1Storing a Position in Memory
1Recalling the Stored Position
The seat will stop moving if you:
• Press the SET button, or a memory button ( (1 or
(2 ).
• Adjust the seat, the steering wheel or the door
mirror position.
• Shift into any position except (P .
The seat, the steering wheel and the door
mirrors will automatically move to the
memorized positions. When it has finished
moving, you will hear the beep, and the
indicator light stays on.
151
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
152 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
Push and hold the adjustment switch to move
the steering wheel in, out, up or down.
Make sure you can see the instrument panel
gauges and indicators.
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
3 WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Controls
152
Adjustment Switch
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you
start driving.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
153 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.
1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2 Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 156
■ Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror and Power Door Mirrors *
The auto dimming function cancels when the shift
position is in (R .
Controls
When driving after dark, the automatic
dimming rearview mirror and power door
mirrors * reduce the glare from headlights
behind you. Press the auto button to turn this
function on and off. When activated, the auto
indicator comes on.
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror and Power Door Mirrors *
Sensor
Indicator
Auto Button
* Not available on all models
153
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
154 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
Power Door Mirrors
Selector
Switch
You can adjust the door mirrors when the
power mode is in ON.
■ Mirror position adjustment
Folding Button
Adjustment
Switch
Controls
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.
■ Folding door mirrors *
Press the folding button to fold in and out the
door mirrors.
■ Reverse Tilt Door Mirror
Slide the selector switch to left
or right to tilt down either side
door mirror.
154
* Not available on all models
If activated, either side door mirror
automatically tilts downward when you put
the shift lever in (R ; this improves close-in
visibility on the selected side of the vehicle
when backing up. The mirror automatically
returns to its original position when you shift
out of (R .
To activate this feature, set the power mode
to ON and slide the selector switch to the left
or right side.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
155 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
■ Automatic Folding Door Mirror Function *
■ Folding in the door mirrors
Press the lock button on the keyless access remote, or press the door lock button on
any door.
u The mirrors start folding in automatically.
■ Folding out the door mirrors
You can turn the automatic folding door mirror
function on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
1Folding out the door mirrors
■ Expanded View Driver’s Mirror
The driver’s side door mirror has outer and
inner segments.
The outer segment is slightly curved to provide
a wider angle view than a standard flat mirror.
This wider view may help you check areas that
are not visible using a standard door mirror.
The door mirrors do not fold out automatically if they
have been folded in using the folding button.
Controls
Press the unlock button on the keyless access remote, or grab the door handle on
any door.
u The mirrors start folding out automatically.
Outer Segment
1Automatic Folding Door Mirror Function *
1Expanded View Driver’s Mirror
Objects visible in the outer segment of the driver’s
side door mirror appear smaller than objects in the
rest of the mirror. But in fact, they are closer than
they appear.
Do not rely on your mirrors. Always look to the side
and behind your vehicle before changing lanes.
Inner Segment
* Not available on all models
155
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
156 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Adjusting the Seats
Adjusting the Seat Positions
Allow sufficient
space.
Move back.
Controls
Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately depress the pedals without
leaning forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.
■ Adjusting the front power seats
3 WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.
Horizontal
Position
Adjustment
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
Height
Adjustment
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
156
1Adjusting the Seats
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
157 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
Higher part of
the Lumbar
support
Lumbar
Support
Adjustment
Switch
Continued
Controls
Lower part of
the Lumbar
support
■ Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch
Press the top: To increase the higher part of
the lumbar support.
Press the bottom: To increase the lower part
of the lumbar support. (The higher part
support is decreased.)
Press the front: To increase the entire
lumbar support.
Press the rear: To decrease the entire lumbar
support.
157
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
158 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
■ Adjusting the Seat-Backs
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.
Controls
158
The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
3 WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back. Doing so may interfere with
proper seat belt or airbag operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
159 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
■ Adjusting the Head Restraints
1Adjusting the Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints
in all seating positions.
■ Adjusting the front and rear outer head restraint positions
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.
Continued
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
In order for the head restraint system to work
properly:
• Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
• Do not place any object between an occupant and
the seat-back.
• Install each restraint in its proper location.
Controls
Position head in the center
of the head restraint.
Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rearimpact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant’s ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.
3 WARNING
159
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
160 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
■ Changing the Rear Center Seat Head Restraint Positions
Controls
A passenger sitting in the center back seating
position should adjust the height of their head
restraint to an appropriate position before the
vehicle begins moving.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.
■ Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
160
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
3 WARNING
To remove a head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
restraint up and out.
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
161 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
■ Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is
off.
3 WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.
Controls
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
161
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
162 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest
Armrest
■ Using the Rear Seat Armrest
Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.
Controls
162
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
163 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
■ Interior Light Switches
Door Activated Position
Off
On
1Interior Light Switches
■ ON
The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
• When you lock the driver’s door.
• When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY
mode.
• When you set the power mode to ON.
Controls
The interior lights come on regardless whether
the doors are open or closed.
■ Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
• When any doors are opened.
• You unlock the driver’s door.
• When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
■ OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless
whether the doors are open or closed.
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade
out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are
closed.
The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following
situations:
• When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open
it.
• When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
If you leave any doors open, the interior lights go off
after about 15 minutes.
Continued
163
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
164 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
■ Map Lights
Front
Controls
164
Rear
1Map Lights
The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the
(map light) button.
When the ceiling light switch is in the door activated
position and any door is open, the map light will not
go off when you press the
(map light) button.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
165 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Interior Convenience Items
■ Glove Box
1Glove Box
Press the release button to open the glove
box.
3 WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.
Glove Box
■ Removable shelf
The shelf in the glove box is detachable. To
remove it, disengage the tabs.
Tab
Controls
Release Button
Shelf
The removable shelf can be stored upside
down in the glove box.
Continued
165
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
166 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Valet Mode
1Valet Mode
You can lock the glove box, trunk, and/or
navigation system, entering a PIN code from
the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
Controls
To lock:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Valet.
3. Select the item you want to be PINprotected from the locked area, then select
OK.
Locked Area
166
If you need to give the key to someone else, lock the
trunk pass-through cover first, and give the keyless
access remote without a built-in key as a valet key.
2 Trunk Pass-through Cover P. 174
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
167 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
4. The previous code is displayed. Select OK.
u You will receive a confirmation message
on the display. Select OK.
The PIN code entering screen also appears when you
press:
• The glove box open button
• The trunk release button on the driver's door, on
the trunk, or on the remote
While the glove box or the trunk is PIN-protected.
If you have locked all the items of the locked area, the
PIN code entering screen appears with the power
mode in ACCESSORY.
You can cancel the valet mode when you manually
open the trunk.
2 When You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 533
Controls
When you enter the PIN code for the first time
or if you want to change the code:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Valet.
3. Select the item you want to be PINprotected from the locked area, then select
OK.
4. Enter your selected four-digit PIN code,
then select OK.
5. You will be asked to enter the same fourdigit PIN code again. Enter, then select OK.
u You will receive a confirmation message
on the display. Select OK.
1Valet Mode
If you have only set Navi, Phone, Audio PINprotected but forgot your four-digit PIN code, you
need to go to a dealer to have the set valet mode
reset.
To unlock:
1. Select Valet.
2. Select Unlock.
3. Enter the four-digit PIN code you have
previously selected, then select OK.
Continued
167
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
168 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Console Compartment
1Console Compartment
Your vehicle has a multi-function center
console. It includes a storage compartment,
an armrest, and a sliding tray.
Push the button on either side of the console
compartment to open the console
compartment.
Controls
168
Button
Button
Sliding
Tray
You can put small items in the sliding tray
located in the console compartment lid. To
use the tray, push the button, then slide the
console compartment lid out fully. To close
the lid, push the button. It is automatically slid
back.
The console compartment light comes on when the
parking lights are on.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
169 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Center Pocket
Slide the lid using release knob to use the
center pocket.
To close it, push the release knob. It is
automatically slid back.
Controls
Knob
Continued
169
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
170 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Beverage Holders
1Beverage Holders
■ Front seat beverage holders
Press the raised detent to open the lid. To
close the lid, push it down until it latches.
NOTICE
Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and
electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.
Push
Controls
■ Front door beverage holders
■ Rear seat beverage holders
The rear beverage holders are in the rear seat
armrest. Open the beverage holders by pulling
the latch up on the front.
Latch
170
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
171 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Accessory Power Sockets
1Accessory Power Sockets
The accessory power sockets can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY
or ON.
■ Accessory power socket (center pocket)
Open the lid and the cover to use it.
NOTICE
Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power sockets are designed to supply
power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180
watts (15 amps) or less.
■ Accessory power socket (console
compartment)
Open the console lid and the cover to use it.
Continued
Controls
To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket
with the engine running.
When both sockets are being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories should not exceed
180 watts (15 amps).
171
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
172 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Coat Hooks
1Coat Hooks
There is a coat hook on the rear grab handle
of both sides. Pull it down to use it.
Controls
172
There is a coat hook on the door pillar of both
sides.
The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy
items.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
173 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Tie-down Anchors
Hook
1Tie-down Anchors
The tie-down anchors on the trunk floor can
be used to install a net for securing items.
1Cargo Hooks
The cargo hooks in the trunk can be used to
install a net for securing items.
Controls
■ Cargo Hooks
Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk,
placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far
forward as possible.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 345
Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk,
placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far
forward as possible.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 345
Hook
Continued
173
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
174 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Trunk Pass-through Cover
Lock
Button
Controls
174
Cover
Pull the rear seat armrest down and push the
button to open the cover.
You have access to the trunk from this
opening in the rear seat-back.
The cover latches when you push it back to
the original position.
You can lock and unlock this cover using the
built-in key.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
175 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Heated Steering Wheel *
1Heated Steering Wheel *
The power mode must be in ON to use the
heated steering wheel.
Do not use the heated steering wheel continuously
when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the
battery may be weakened, making the engine
difficult to start.
Press the button on the left side of the
steering wheel.
The heated steering wheel is turned off every
time you start the engine, even if you turned it
on the last time you drove the vehicle.
* Not available on all models
Continued
Controls
When a comfortable temperature is reached,
press the button again to turn it off.
175
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
176 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Front Seat Heaters *
1Front Seat Heaters *
The power mode must be in ON to use the
seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats
faster than the LO setting.
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Controls
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
Press the seat heater button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
When a comfortable temperature is reached
while using the seat heaters in HI, select MID
or LO to keep the seat warm.
176
3 WARNING
* Not available on all models
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
177 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation *
1Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation *
3 WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Press the seat heater or the seat ventilation
button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
Do not use the seat heaters and the seat ventilation
even in LO when the engine is OFF. Under such
conditions, the battery may be weakened, making
the engine difficult to start.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
Controls
If the power mode is in ON:
Seat heater - The HI setting heats the seats
faster than the LO setting.
Seat ventilation - The HI setting ventilates
the seats faster than the LO setting.
When a comfortable temperature is reached
while using the seat heaters in HI, select MID
or LO to keep the seat warm.
* Not available on all models
Continued
177
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
178 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Rear Seat Heaters *
1Rear Seat Heaters *
If the power mode is in ON: The HI setting
heats the seats faster than the LO setting.
Controls
There is no heater in the rear center seating
position.
Press the seat heater button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
When a comfortable temperature is reached
while using the seat heaters in HI, select MID
or LO to keep the seat warm.
■ Sunglasses Holder
You can store eyeglasses and other small
items in this holder.
178
* Not available on all models
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
1Sunglasses Holder
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release the indent. To close, push it again until
it latches.
Push
3 WARNING
Keep the holder closed while driving except when
accessing stored items.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
179 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Power Rear Sunshade *
1Power Rear Sunshade *
3 WARNING
The power rear sunshade can be operated with the power mode in ON.
To raise: Press the button.
Front
To lower: Press the button again.
If the sunshade stops while moving, check for
and clear any obstacles, then push the button
again.
Opening or closing the sunshade on
someone’s hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the sunshade before opening or closing it.
Controls
Rear
* Not available on all models
Continued
179
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
180 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
■ Expanded Rear Door Sunshades *
Hook
Controls
180
Tab
* Not available on all models
Pull the tab and roll up the sunshade all the
way. Use the hooks to hang it.
1Expanded Rear Door Sunshades *
Use the sunshades only when the windows are fully
closed. Using the shade while a window is open can
unhook and blow off the shade, hitting and possibly
hurting anyone sitting near the window.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
181 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers
the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons/icons on the touch screen are pressed
while using the climate control system in AUTO, the
function of the button/icon that was pressed will take
priority.
The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button/icon that was pressed will be
controlled automatically.
Driver’s Side
Temperature
Passenger’s Side
Temperature
Driver’s Side
Temperature
Control Switch
Passenger’s Side
Temperature
Control Switch
(On/off) Button
AUTO Button
Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side
temperature control switch.
3. Press the
(on/off) button to cancel.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on auto, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
Controls
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may operate at low speed for a while after the
AUTO button has been pressed.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Pressing the
button switches the climate control
system between on and off. When turned on, the
system returns to your last selection.
When you unlock the doors with your remote, the
driver’s ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the
climate control settings are turned to the respective
mode automatically when you set the power mode to
ON.
In addition to the button/switch operations, you can control the climate control
system from the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM touch screen.
Continued
181
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
182 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
■ Operating from the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
On Demand Multi-Use Display
TM
A/C (Air Conditioning) and
SYNC (Synchronized) Icon
Recirculation/
Fresh Air mode
Icon
Controls
Driver’s Side
Vent Mode Icon
Passenger’s Side
Vent Mode Icon
Driver’s Side
Temperature Control
Icon
Passenger’s Side
Temperature Control
Icon
Fan Control Icon
182
1Using Automatic Climate Control
You can store two customized climate control
settings to the system and recall them from the On
Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
2 Shortcuts P. 198
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
183 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
■ Changing the interior temperature setting
The side you selected.
Temperature bar: Select a point where your
desired temperature setting is.
Farther to the left is for a lower, and to the
right for a higher setting.
3/4: To raise or lower the temperature
setting one degree at a time.
While you select and hold 3/4, the
temperature decreases or increases.
MAX COOL ON/OFF: To rapidly cool down
the interior.
u The AUTO indicator comes on. The
setting returns to the previously selected
value when you select it again.
MAX HEAT ON/OFF: To rapidly warm up the
interior.
u The AUTO indicator comes on. The
setting returns to the previously selected
value when you select it again.
Continued
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
When you set the MAX COOL or MAX HEAT, MAX
COOL or MAX HEAT is displayed.
Controls
Temperature Bar
1Using Automatic Climate Control
1. Select the driver’s or passenger’s side
temperature control.
2. Change the temperature setting from the
following:
183
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
184 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
■ Switching the vent mode
The side you selected.
1Switching the vent mode
1. Select the driver’s or passenger’s side vent
mode.
2. Select a desired vent mode icon, or Driver
Mode Auto (driver’s side)/Passenger
Mode Auto (passenger’s side): The system
automatically selects the vent mode most
suitable to the ambient environment.
Controls
Vent mode
: Dashboard vents and back of the center
console
: Dashboard and floor vents, and back of
the center console
: Floor vents
: Floor and defroster vents (driver’s side
only)
■ A/C on and off
1. Select A/C.
2. Select ON or OFF.
184
While the climate control system is in AUTO, Driver
Mode Auto or Passenger Mode Auto is
highlighted.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
185 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
■ SYNC on and off
1SYNC on and off
When you press the
button, the system changes
to synchronized mode.
When the system is in dual mode, the driver’s side
temperature and vent mode, and the passenger’s
side temperature and vent mode can be set
separately.
You can also return to dual mode by changing the
passenger’s side temperature or switching the vent mode.
The system adjusts each temperature based on the
information of the sunlight sensor and the sun
position updated by the navigation system’s GPS.
■ Changing the fan speed
Fan Speed Level Indicators
Controls
1. Select SYNC.
2. Select ON for synchronized mode, and OFF
for dual mode.
u When in synchronized mode, the
passenger’s side temperature and vent
mode become the same as the driver’s
side settings.
3. Adjust the temperature or change the
mode from the driver’s side.
1Changing the fan speed
1. Select
.
2. Change the fan speed with one of the
following:
The fan speed level indicators: Select your
desired speed level. The smaller indicator is
for a slower speed, and the larger for a
faster speed.
(+ / (- : To go up or down one level at a
time.
Fan AUTO: The system automatically
selects the fan speed most suitable to the
ambient environment.
Continued
While the climate control system is in AUTO, Fan
AUTO is highlighted.
185
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
186 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
1. Select
,
or
currently
shown.
2. Switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions to the following:
Controls
186
(recirculation mode): Recirculates air
from the vehicle’s interior through the system.
(auto mode): Automatically switch
between the recirculation and fresh air modes
most suitable to environmental conditions. If
the ambient temperature is low, the mode
may not change to recirculation to keep the
windows from fogging up.
(fresh air mode): Maintains outside
ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode
in normal situations.
1Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
While the climate control system is in AUTO,
highlighted.
is
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
187 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
■ Shortcuts
You can store two sets of your preferred temperature, fan speed, and vent mode
settings to the climate control system.
To store a set of the climate control settings:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Adjust the climate control system to your
preference.
1Shortcuts
You can also store a set by pressing and holding the
preset number you want to store that setting after
step 3.
2 Climate Control System P. 181
Controls
3. Select Climate.
4. Select Edit.
5. Select Add.
6. Select Preset 1 or Preset 2 you want to
store your settings to.
To recall one of the settings:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Climate.
3. Select Preset 1 or Preset 2.
To delete a preset:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Climate.
3. Select Edit.
4. Select Delete.
5. Select Preset 1 or Preset 2 you want to
delete.
Continued
187
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
188 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
Pressing the
button turns the air
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
Press the
button again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
Controls
1To rapidly defrost the windows
■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Press the
button.
2. Select the recirculation mode.
2 Switching between the recirculation
and fresh air modes P. 186
188
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode.
If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the
windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes
visibility.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
189 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
■ Rear Temperature Control Dial
Dial up to raise
the temperature.
Rear
Temperature
Control Dial
The rear temperature can be adjusted when the
climate control system is on.
Controls
Position of driver’s
temperature
You can set the rear passenger compartment
temperature different than the driver’s, using
the rear temperature control dial.
1Rear Temperature Control Dial
Dial down to lower
the temperature.
189
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
190 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
Automatic Climate Control Sensors
The automatic climate control system is
equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill
any liquid on them.
Sensor
Controls
Sensor
190
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
191 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.
Audio System
About Your Audio System................ 192
USB Port .......................................... 193
Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 193
Audio System Theft Protection ......... 194
Audio Remote Controls.................... 195
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 196
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM....... 197
Audio/Information Screen ................ 205
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 209
Display Setup ................................... 210
Voice Control Operation .................. 211
Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 219
Playing SiriusXM® Radio ................... 224
Playing a CD .................................... 227
Playing Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio.... 230
Playing an iPod ................................ 240
Song By VoiceTM (SBV)...................... 244
Playing Internet Radio ...................... 248
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 251
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 254
Audio Error Messages
CD Player......................................... 256
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio............ 257
iPod/USB Flash Drive ........................ 258
Pandora® ......................................... 259
AhaTM Radio..................................... 260
General Information on the Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio Service ................... 261
Recommended CDs ......................... 262
Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash
Drives ................................................264
Customized Features ............................265
Defaulting All the Settings........................289
Deleting all HDD Data ..............................290
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver .......291
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Using HFL ........................................ 293
HFL Menus ...................................... 295
AcuraLink® ............................................333
191
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
192 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Audio System
About Your Audio System
See the Navigation System Manual for information on the navigation system.
1About Your Audio System
The audio system features AM/FM radio and the SiriusXM® Radio service. It can also
play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, Hard Disk Drive (HDD) audio, USB flash drives,
and iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth® devices.
SiriusXM® Radio is available on a subscription basis
only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio,
contact a dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 261
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the
icons on the touchscreen interface.
SiriusXM® Radio is available in the United States and
Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
iPod
SiriusXM® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM
Radio, Inc.
Features
Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not
supported.
Remote Controls
iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
When the screen is viewed through polarized
sunglasses, a rainbow pattern may appear on the
screen due to optical characteristics of the screen. If
this is disturbing, please operate the screen without
polarized sunglasses.
192
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
193 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio SystemuUSB Port
USB Port
Install the iPod dock connector or the USB
flash drive to the USB port.
1USB Port
• Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the
•
•
•
•
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
reboot, follow the manufacturer’s instructions
provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod.
Auxiliary Input Jack
Features
•
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
We recommend using an extension cable with the
USB port.
Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
hub.
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
We recommend your data backed up before using
the device in your vehicle.
Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
1Auxiliary Input Jack
Use the jack to connect standard audio
devices.
1. Open the AUX cover.
2. Connect a standard audio device to the
input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo
miniplug.
u The audio system automatically switches
to the AUX mode.
You can return to the AUX mode by selecting
Change Source on the Audio menu screen or
Audio Source on the On Demand Multi-Use
DisplayTM.
193
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
194 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection
Audio System Theft Protection
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system
may display Enter code. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.
■ Reactivating the audio system
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Turn on the audio system.
3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize
the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
Features
194
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
195 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Audio Remote Controls
Allows you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button
Left Selector Wheel
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FM AM SiriusXM® CD HDD USB
iPod Bluetooth® Audio Pandora® * AhaTM
AUX
1Audio Remote Controls
Some mode appears only when an appropriate
device or medium is used.
To select audio mode, press the SOURCE button,
then move the left selector wheel to the right or left.
SOURCE Button
* Not available on all models
Features
Left Selector Wheel
Roll Up: To increase the volume.
Roll Down: To decrease the volume.
Push: To mute. Push again to unmute.
• When listening to the radio
Move to the right: To select the next preset radio station.
Move to the left: To select the previous preset radio station.
Move to the right and hold: To select the next strong station.
Move to the left and hold: To select the previous strong station.
• When listening to a CD, HDD, iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Move to the right: To skip to the next song.
Move to the left: To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
Move to the right and hold: To go the group up. (Bluetooth® Audio only)
Move to the left and hold: To go the group down. (Bluetooth® Audio only)
• When listening to a CD, HDD or USB flash drive
Move to the right and hold: To skip to the next folder.
Move to the left and hold: To go back to the previous folder.
• When listening to Pandora® *
Move to the right: To skip to the next song.
Move to the right and hold: To select the next station.
Move to the left and hold: To select the previous station.
195
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
196 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Use the interface dial or MENU button to
BACK Button
MENU Button
access some audio functions.
Press
to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
Button
Features
196
Interface Dial
Interface dial: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection. Move right, left, up or down to
select secondary menu.
MENU button: Press to select any mode. The
available mode includes Sound, Change
Source, Refresh Station List, Save Preset,
Radio Text, Music Search, and play modes.
Play modes can be also selected from Scan,
Random/Repeat, and so on.
BACK button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
button: Press to change the audio/
information screen brightness.
Press
once and make an adjustment.
u Each time you press
, the mode
switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and off mode.
1Audio System Basic Operation
Voice Control System
The navigation system is voice operable.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 211
These indications are used to show how to operate
the interface dial.
Rotate
to select.
Press
to enter.
Move
,
,
or
to select secondary menu.
Audio Menu Items
2 Sound P. 209
2 Refresh Station List P. 221
2 Save Preset P. 220, 226
2 Radio Text P. 222
2 Music Search P. 228, 232, 242, 252
2 Scan P. 229, 233, 253
2 Random/Repeat P. 229, 233, 243, 253
When you unlock the doors with your remote, the
driver’s ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the
audio system settings and preset memory are turned
to the respective mode automatically when you set
the power mode to ON.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
197 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuOn Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Use the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM to operate the audio system.
1On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source
selected.
■ Selecting an Audio Source
Select X to go back to the previous screen.
Select Audio Source.
Use the
/
/
/
icons to turn the page.
1Selecting an Audio Source
You can change the order of source icons displayed.
Features
Source List Icons
Select Audio Source, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio
source.
■ Displaying the Menu Items
1. Select Audio Source,
, then Edit Order.
2. Select two icons, then select Done.
The locations of these icons are switched.
To go back to the original display order, select
Default.
Select More.
Menu Items
Select More to display the menu items.
Continued
197
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
198 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuOn Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
■ Shortcuts
Shortcuts Icon
Features
198
1Shortcuts
You can preset the settings of four or three
categories (Places, Phone, Climate, Audio)
from Shortcuts.
The preset memory is cleared when it is disconnected
from the power source, such as when the battery is
disconnected or goes dead.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
199 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuOn Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
1Places
See the Navigation System Manual for how to store
address book entries, and enter your home address.
Features
■ Places
You can store up to six addresses, and the home address for your preset
destinations.
To store an address on the selected preset
number:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Places.
3. Select Edit or No Entry.
u If you select No Entry, go to step 6.
4. Select Add.
u All the six preset icons appear.
5. Select the preset number to which you
want to store an address.
6. The screen changes to a list of addresses
stored in your address book.
7. Select an address you want to store as a
preset.
To enter one of the preset addresses, or
Home as your destination:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Places.
3. Select a preset number or Home.
u The system starts to calculate the route
to your selected destination.
Continued
199
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
200 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuOn Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
To delete a preset address:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Places.
3. Select Edit.
4. Select Delete.
5. Select the preset number with the destination you want to delete.
Features
200
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
201 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuOn Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
1Phone
Dial icon
You can make a call using the keyboard on the On
Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM to input numbers.
2 To make a call using a phone number
P. 321
Features
■ Phone
You can preset five speed dial entries, and make a call from one of the preset
numbers, or call history when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle‘s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system. 2 Phone Setup P. 299
To preset a speed dial:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Phone.
3. Select Speed Dial.
4. Select Edit or No Entry.
u If you select No Entry, go to step 6.
5. Select Add.
u Five presets appear. Select a No Entry
preset or an existing preset.
u The screen changes to a list of previously
stored speed dial entries.
6. Select a number you want to store as a
shortcut.
To make a call from a speed dial entry:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Phone.
3. Select Speed Dial.
4. Select a preset number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
Continued
201
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
202 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuOn Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
To delete a speed dial:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Phone.
3. Select Speed Dial.
4. Select Edit.
5. Select Delete.
6. Select the preset number with the phone
number you want to delete.
Features
202
To make a call from call history:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Phone.
3. Select Call History.
4. Select a phone number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1Phone
The call history displays the last six dialed, received, or
missed calls.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
203 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuOn Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
■ Audio
You can store up to six radio stations, and HDD audio album/play lists when playing
AM, FM, or SiriusXM® radio, or HDD audio.
To preset a station or song:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Tune to a radio station or select a song from
HDD audio.
1Audio
You can also preset a station or song by pressing and
holding the preset icon you want to store that station
or song after step 3.
2 Playing AM/FM Radio P. 219
2 Playing SiriusXM® Radio P. 224
2 Playing Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
P. 230
Features
3. Select Audio.
4. Select Edit or No Entry.
u If you select No Entry, go to step 6.
5. Select Add.
6. Select the preset icon you want to store the
station or song to.
To play a preset station or song:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Audio.
3. Select a preset icon.
To delete a preset station or song:
1. Select Shortcuts.
2. Select Audio.
3. Select Edit.
4. Select Delete.
5. Select the preset icon with the radio station
or a song you want to delete.
Continued
203
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
204 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuOn Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
■ Adjusting the Sound
1Adjusting the Sound
1. Select More, then Sound.
2. Use (+ , (- or other icons to adjust the
setting.
Select Off, Low, Mid or High for the SVC setting.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 209
Instead of using (+ , (- or icons, you can also touch
the point where your desired setting is.
1Changing the Screen Settings
Features
■ Changing the Screen Settings
1. Select More, then Screen Settings.
2. Use (+ , (- or other icons to adjust the
setting.
The followings are adjustable screen settings:
• Sync Display Brightness
Selects whether the screen brightness synchronizes
with the instruments panel brightness.
• Brightness
• Contrast
• Black Level
• Display
Changes between the daytime or nighttime modes.
• Beep
Mutes a beep that sounds every time you touch the
screen.
• Keyboard
Changes the on-screen keyboard from the
alphabetical order to the qwerty type.
• Vibration
Turns on and off the vibration when you touch the
screen.
• Fade Timer
Sets the screen black out timing.
Instead of using (+ , (- or icons, you can also touch
the point where your desired setting is.
204
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
205 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.
■ Switching the Display
Press the NAV, PHONE, INFO and AUDIO buttons to go to the corresponding
display.
Navigation
Phone
Info
Audio
NAV
Button
PHONE
Button
INFO
Button
AUDIO
Button
NAV
Button
PHONE
Button
INFO
Button
Features
Models with surround view
camera system
AUDIO
Button
Models without surround view
camera system
Continued
205
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
206 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.
■ Navigation
Shows the navigation screen. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
■ Phone
Shows the HFL information. 2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 293
■ Info
Shows the Trip Computer or Clock/Wallpaper and other information. Rotate
to select an item, then press .
Features
■ Trip computer (Current Drive)
Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy from your last trip.
■ Trip computer (History of Trip A)
Shows the range, average fuel economy and distances traveled for the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three driving cycles.
Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The
history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.
■ Deleting the history manually
1. Move on the History of Trip A screen to select Delete History, then press .
2. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate
to select Yes,
then press .
■ Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
206
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
207 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
■ Wallpaper Setup
1Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.
• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
•
•
•
•
2 USB Port P. 193
Continued
•
•
Features
2. Press the SETTINGS button.
3. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
4. Move
or
to select the Clock tab.
5. Rotate
to select Clock/Wallpaper
Type, then press .
6. Move
to select Wallpaper.
u The screen will change to the wallpaper
list.
7. Move to select Add New, then press .
8. Rotate
to select a desired picture.
u The preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
9. Press , then move to select Start
Import.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the
wallpaper list.
in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 6 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
207
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
208 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
■ Select wallpaper
From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Preview
and press
to see a preview at full-size screen.
Features
■ Delete wallpaper
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
3. Move
or
to select the Clock tab.
4. Rotate
to select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then press .
5. Move
to select Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
6. Rotate
to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
7. Press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
8. Rotate
to select Delete, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
9. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
to delete completely.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
208
1Wallpaper Setup
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
3. Move
or
to select the Clock tab.
4. Rotate
to select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then press .
5. Move
to select Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
6. Rotate
to select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
7. Press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
8. Rotate
to select Set, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
.
To go back to the previous screen, press
OK, or press the BACK button.
to select
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
209 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Adjusting the Sound
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Sound, then press
Rotate
choices:
to scroll through the following
Bass
MENU Button
1Adjusting the Sound
.
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
DTS Neural Surround is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Treble
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 204
Fader
Features
Balance
Center
Subwoofer
SVC
Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation
DTS Neural
Surround
209
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
210 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.
■ Changing the Screen Brightness
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Display tab.
4. Rotate
to select Brightness, then press
.
5. Rotate
to adjust the setting.
Features
■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Others tab.
4. Rotate
to select Background Color,
then press .
5. Rotate
to select the setting you want,
then press .
210
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
211 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Voice Control Operation
Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation of most of
the navigation system functions.
The voice control system uses the
(Talk) and
(hang-up/back) buttons on the
steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.
1Voice Control Operation
■ Voice Recognition
1Voice Recognition
The voice control system can only be used from the
driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes
noises from the front passenger’s side.
Features
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system:
• Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using.
• Close the windows and moonroof.
• Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling.
• Speak clearly in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
• Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
• Refer to the Voice Help feature.
When you press the
button, a helpful prompt asks
what you would like to do. Press and release the
button again to bypass this prompt and give a
command.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Continued
211
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
212 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
■ Voice Portal Commands
The system accepts these commands on the
Voice Portal screen.
• Call Your contact name
• Call Phone Number
• Find nearest POI category name
• Go home
• Route menu
• Cancel route
■ On Screen Commands
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Features
■ Phone Commands
■ Info Commands
The system accepts these commands on any
screen.
• Call by number
• Call by name
The system accepts these commands on any
screen.
• Trip computer
• Traffic information
• Display clock
• Display wallpaper
Contacts that are imported from your
phone to the vehicle are all made available
by voice. Voice Tags can also be recorded
for each of your Speed Dial entries.
212
■ Navigation Commands
When the
(Talk) button is pressed,
available voice commands appear on the
screen.
For a complete list of commands, say “Voice
Help” after the beep.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
213 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
■ Climate Control Commands
Driver temperature up
Driver temperature down
Passenger temperature up
Passenger temperature down
Temperature max heat
Temperature max cool
Driver temperature max heat
Driver temperature max cool
Passenger temperature max heat
Passenger temperature max cool
Climate control sync on*1
Climate control sync off*1
*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.
■ Audio Commands
The system accepts these commands on
most screens.
■ Song By VoiceTM commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Music search
List album (specify album)
List artist (specify artist)
List composer (specify composer)
List genre (specify genre)
List playlist (specify playlist)
Play album (specify album)
Play artist (specify artist)
Play composer (specify composer)
Play genre (specify genre)
Play playlist (specify playlist)
Play song (specify song)
What am I listening to?
Who am I listening to?
Who is this?
What’s playing?
Who’s playing?
What album is this?
Features
The system accepts these commands on
most screens.
• Climate control automatic*1
• Climate control off*1
• Air conditioner on*1
• Air conditioner off*1
• Climate control defrost on*1
• Climate control defrost off*1
• Rear defrost on*1
• Rear defrost off*1
• Climate control fresh air
• Climate control recirculate
• Climate control vent
• Climate control bi-level
• Climate control floor
• Climate control floor and defrost
• Fan speed up
• Fan speed down
• Fan speed # (#: 1 to 7)
• Temperature # degrees (#: 57 to 87°F, 15
to 29°C)
• Driver temperature # degrees (#: 57 to
87°F, 15 to 29°C)
• Passenger temperature # degrees (#: 57
to 87°F, 15 to 29°C)
• Temperature up
• Temperature down
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
■ Using Song By VoiceTM
Song By VoiceTM is a feature that allows you
to select music from your Hard Disk Drive or
iPod device using your voice.
To activate this mode, you must press the
(Talk) button on the Voice Portal screen
and say: “Music search.”
Continued
213
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
214 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features
■ HDD commands
■ Radio commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hard Disk Drive play
Hard Disk Drive play track # (#: 1 to 30)
Hard Disk Drive skip forward
Hard Disk Drive skip back
Hard Disk Drive album up*2
Hard Disk Drive album down*2
Hard Disk Drive track up
Hard Disk Drive track down
Hard Disk Drive playlist up*2
Hard Disk Drive playlist down*2
Hard Disk Drive track random*1
Hard Disk Drive track repeat*1
Hard Disk Drive track scan*1
Hard Disk Drive normal play
What am I listening to?
Who am I listening to?
Who is this?
What’s playing?
Who’s playing?
What album is this?
*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.
*2: These commands are available only in
the corresponding playback mode.
For example, “Artist” commands are
available only in “Artist” mode.
214
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Audio on*1
Audio off*1
Radio on*1
Radio off*1
Radio select FM
Radio select AM
Radio tune to # FM
(#: frequency from 87.7 to 107.9)
Radio tune to # AM
(#: frequency from 530 [five thirty] to
1710 [seventeen ten])
Radio seek up
Radio seek down
Radio next station
Radio preset # (#: 1 to 12)
Radio FM preset # (#: 1 to 12)
Radio AM preset # (#: 1 to 6)
Radio scan*1
Radio select XM
XM channel #
(#: 0 to 255 [two fifty five])
XM channel down
XM category up
XM category down
XM preset # (#: 1 to 12)
XM scan*1
XM category mode
XM channel mode
*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.
NOTE:
Radio volume levels cannot be controlled
using voice control.
■ Disc commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Disc play
Disc play track # (#: 1 to 30)
Disc skip forward
Disc skip back
Disc track random*1
Disc track repeat*1
Disc track scan*1
Disc folder up
Disc folder down
Disc folder random*1
Disc folder repeat*1
Disc folder scan*1
Disc normal play
*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
215 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
■ iPod commands
■ USB commands
■ Bluetooth® Audio commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.
USB play
USB play track # (#: 1 to 30)
USB skip forward
USB skip back
USB track random*1
USB track repeat*1
USB track scan*1
USB folder up
USB folder down
USB folder random*1
USB folder repeat*1
USB folder scan*1
USB normal play
*1: These commands toggle the function
on and off, so the command may not match
your intended action.
Bluetooth Audio play
Bluetooth Audio skip forward
Bluetooth Audio skip back
Bluetooth Audio group up
Bluetooth Audio group down
Bluetooth Audio pause
Bluetooth Audio resume
Bluetooth Audio track random
Bluetooth Audio track repeat
NOTE:
Bluetooth® Audio commands may not work
on some phones or Bluetooth® Audio
devices.
Features
iPod play
iPod play track # (#: 1 to 30)
iPod skip forward
iPod skip back
iPod track shuffle*1
iPod album shuffle*1
iPod track repeat*1
iPod normal play
What am I listening to?
Who am I listening to?
Who is this?
What’s playing?
Who’s playing?
What album is this?
■ AUX commands
• Auxiliary play
Continued
215
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
216 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
■ Pandora® commands *
■ AhaTM Radio commands
■ Internet service commands *
The system accepts these commands while
the Pandora® is playing.
• Pandora play
• Pandora skip forward
• Pandora station up
• Pandora station down
• Pandora pause
• Pandora resume
• Pandora thumbs up
• Pandora thumbs down
The system accepts these commands while
the AhaTM is playing.
• Aha radio play
• Aha radio skip forward
• Aha radio skip back
• Aha radio station up
• Aha radio station down
• Aha radio resume
• Aha radio pause
• Aha radio like
• Aha radio dislike
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Features
216
* Not available on all models
Internet service play
Internet service skip forward*1
Internet service skip back*1
Internet service station up*1
Internet service station down*1
Internet service resume*1
Internet service pause*1
Internet service like*1
Internet service dislike*1
*1: The system accepts these commands
while the Internet service is playing.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
217 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
■ Keyboard Entry Commands
In keyboard screen, letters can be selected
by saying each individual letter or by saying
a keyword phrase. These keyword phrases
are:
■ Letters
Say . . .
Or say . . .
Apple/Alpha
Boy/Bravo
Charlie
Dog/Delta
Edward/Echo
Frank/Foxtrot
George/Golf
Henry/Hotel
Igloo/India
John/Juliet
King/Kilo
Larry/Lima
Mary/Mike
Nancy/November
Oscar
Paul/Papa
Queen/Quebec
Robert/Romeo
Sam/Sierra
Tom/Tango
Uncle/Uniform
Victor
William/Whiskey
X-ray
Yellow/Yankee
Zebra/Zulu
Number . . .
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Or say . . .
Zero
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine
Features
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
■ Numbers
Continued
217
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
218 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
■ Symbols
Features
218
Symbol . . .
!
“
#
$
%
&
‘
(
)
~
/
<
>
{
}
■ Accented letters
Or say . . .
Hyphen
Exclamation point
Double Quote
Pound
Dollar
Percent
Ampersand
Apostrophe
Open Parenthesis
Close Parenthesis
Tilde
Slash
Less than
Greater than
Open Brace
Close Brace
Symbol . . .
À
Â
Ä
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Î
Ï
Ô
Ù
Û
Ü
Or say . . .
A grave
A circumflex
A umlaut
C cedilla
E grave
E acute
E circumflex
E umlaut
I grave
I circumflex
I umlaut
O circumflex
U grave
U circumflex
U umlaut
■ Punctuation marks
Symbol . . .
@
^
*
_
`
,
.
?
:
;
+
Or say . . .
At Sign
Caret
Asterisk
Underscore
Back Quote
Comma
Dot
Question mark
Colon
Semicolon
Plus
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
219 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Playing AM/FM Radio
Audio/Information Screen
Audio Source
Select to change a band or change
an audio source.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
VOL (Volume) Knob
(Pushed out)
Turn to adjust the volume.
Preset Icons
Select to store a station.
To listen to a stored channel, select
1-6 (AM) or 1-12 (FM).
Models with HD RadioTM feature
iPod/iPhone
TAG
Select to tag the song if it is played on
an HD RadioTM station. The iPod/iPhone
should be connected to the audio
system to store the tagged song
information on your device.
Features
Tune
Select to switch to tune mode.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to search up
and down the selected band for
a station with a strong signal.
Tune Up/Down Icons
Select or to tune the radio frequency.
Scan
Select to sample each of the
strongest stations on the selected
band for 10 seconds.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select preset radio
stations.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
Continued
219
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
220 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
■ Preset Memory
To store a station:
Interface Dial
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Save Preset, then press .
4. Rotate
to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press
.
Features
You can also store that station by the following procedure.
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Rotate
to select the preset number you want to store the station.
3. Press and hold
for a few seconds.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Select More.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.
You can also store that station by the following procedure.
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Change the display to the preset screen.
3. Select and hold the preset number you want to store that station.
220
1Playing AM/FM Radio
You can control the AM/FM radio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 211
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 195
You can also switch the mode by pressing the MENU
button and selecting Change Source on the Audio
menu screen.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.
Models with HD RadioTM feature
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license
from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign
Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and
"Arc" logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
221 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
■ Radio Data System (RDS)
1Playing AM/FM Radio
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Move
tab.
2. Rotate
.
or
to select the Station List
to select the station, then press
Continued
Features
■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press the MENU button while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate
to select Refresh Station List, then press .
Models with HD RadioTM feature
iTunes Tagging
“iTunes” in “iTunes Tagging” is a trademark of Apple Inc.
When an HD RadioTM station is selected, the HD
indicator appears on the audio/information screen
and On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
If you want to have the information on the song
played from the HD RadioTM station, select TAG in On
Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM or select Tag Song in
the menu with Interface dial.
If iPod/iPhone is connected, the tag is transferred to the
connected device immediately, otherwise the tag will be
transferred when the device will be connected and
select Tag Song in the menu with Interface dial.
221
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
222 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
■ Radio text
Display the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Radio Text, then press .
■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
Interface Dial
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan, then press .
To turn off scan, press
to select Cancel Scan, or press the BACK button.
Features
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
2 Playing AM/FM Radio P. 219
To turn off scan, select Stop Scan.
Models with HD RadioTM feature
■ Tag song to device
You can store the TAG information in the connected iPod/iPhone.
If the iPod/iPhone is not connected to the audio system, the information is stored in
the audio unit temporarily, then once the device is connected to the system, data is
transferred to the iPod/iPhone.
To store the TAG information to the iPod/iPhone, or the audio system:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Tag Song, then press .
3. Select the song you want to save the information.
222
1Radio text
The text indicator comes on when you received a text
message. The indicator stays on until you read the
message.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
223 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
■ Tagged song list
Displays the TAG information saved to the audio system.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Tagged Song List, then press .
■ HD subchannel
Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected.
Interface Dial
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select HD Subchannel, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a channel from a list, then press
.
or
when the subchannel number is displayed.
Features
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Select the
You can also select the channel by the following procedure.
1. Select More.
2. Select HD Subchannel.
3. Select the channel number.
223
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
224 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Playing SiriusXM® Radio
Audio/Information Screen
Audio Source
Select to change an audio source.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
VOL (Volume) Knob
(Pushed out)
Turn to adjust the volume.
Features
Tune
Select to switch to tune mode.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Preset Icons
Select to store a station.
To listen to a stored channel, select
1-12.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to the previous
or next channel.
In channel mode, select and hold
to change the channel rapidly.
Scan
Select to sample each of the
strongest stations on the selected
band for 10 seconds.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
224
Category Up/Down Icons
Select
or
to display and select
an SiriusXM® Radio category.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select preset radio
stations.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
225 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
■ To Play the SiriusXM® Radio
1Playing SiriusXM® Radio
You can control the SiriusXM® radio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 211
1. Select the SiriusXM® mode.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 195
2 On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM P. 197
In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
Interface Dial
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Channel List, then press .
4. Rotate
to select a channel from a list, then press
On Demand Multi-Use Display
.
TM
SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order,
which can take about a minute. Once they have
loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make
your selections.
To change the tune mode:
Interface Dial
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select XM Tune Mode, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Channel Mode or Category Mode, then press
Features
2. Select a channel using the , ,
,
icons on the tune mode screen or
the preset numbers (1-12) on the preset mode screen.
There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does
not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title).
This does not indicate a problem with your audio
system.
.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
1. Select More.
2. Select XM Tune Mode.
3. Select Channel Mode or Category Mode.
Continued
225
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
226 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
■ Preset Memory
To store a station:
Interface Dial
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Save Preset, then press .
4. Rotate
to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press
.
Features
You can also store that station by the following procedure.
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Rotate
to select the preset number you want to store the station.
3. Press and hold
for a few seconds.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Select More.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.
You can also store that station by the following procedure.
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Change the display to the preset screen.
3. Select and hold the preset number you want to store that station.
226
1Playing SiriusXM® Radio
You can store 12 SiriusXM® stations into the preset
memory.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
227 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or
AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.
Audio/Information Screen
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Audio Source
Select to change an audio source.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Scan
Select to use a scan feature.
Random
Select to use a random feature.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
Folder Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder, and
to skip to the beginning of the
previous folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC.
Features
VOL (Volume) Knob (Pushed out)
Turn to adjust the volume.
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the CD
slot.
Repeat
Select to use a repeat feature.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Select and hold to move rapidly within
a track/file.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Continued
227
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
228 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List
(MP3/WMA/AAC)
NOTICE
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .
Features
Folder Selection
3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a file from the Music Search list.
File Selection
228
1Playing a CD
You can also select a file by the following
procedure.
1. Rotate
or press
to display the song
list.
2. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a file from the list.
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA and AAC files protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.
• When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
You can control a CD audio using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 211
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
229 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
Interface Dial
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
1. Select Scan, Random, or Repeat.
2 Playing a CD P. 227
Random/Repeat is selected.
2. Select a mode.
Interface Dial
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.
Features
■ To turn off a play mode
.
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second
sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).
.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
1. Select Scan, Random, or Repeat.
2 Playing a CD P. 227
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
229
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
230 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
Playing Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
The Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio function plays tracks from music CDs that have
been recorded onto the built-in HDD. You can arrange the tracks in playlists or play
the tracks using various search methods.
Audio/Information Screen
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Audio Source
Select to change an audio source.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Features
VOL (Volume) Knob (Pushed out)
Turn to adjust the volume.
Scan
Select to use a scan feature.
Random
Select to use a random feature.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display
or cancel a setting.
230
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the CD
slot.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
Playlist/Album Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next playlist/
album, and
to skip to the beginning
of the previous playlist/album.
Repeat
Select to use a repeat feature.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change tracks.
Select and hold to move rapidly within
a track.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
SETTINGS Button
Press to go the Setting menu screen.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
231 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
■ Recording a Music CD to HDD
1Recording a Music CD to HDD
The songs on music CDs are automatically recorded by factory default to the HDD
the first time you play each disc. You can then play the songs directly from the HDD.
Recording Indicator
Album AAA
01 Track AAA
10
If you stop the engine or the power system is turned
off while recording a CD, there may be pauses
between songs when you play back from the HDD.
01’23”
Artist AAA
You can add tracks to user playlists, where you can
mix and match tracks from other CDs recorded on
the HDD.
2 Editing an Album or Playlist P. 234
2 Editing Track Information P. 237
Recording
Ready to record
Repeat, random, and scan functions are not available
during recording.
■ Stop Recording
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Cancel Record to HDD, then press
Please note that there is no compensation offered in
the case of unsuccessful recording of audio data or
the loss of audio data due to any cause whatsoever.
.
■ Recording a CD Manually
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Rec to HDD, then press
Features
You can play music from other sources (e.g.,
SiriusXM®, HDD, etc.) while recording.
Clearing the HDD
Any music tracks stored on the HDD can be deleted.
2 Deleting all HDD Data P. 290
.
Continued
231
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
232 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
■ How to Select a Track from the Music Search List
Features
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a track from the Music Search list.
u Title information is displayed if found in
the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote®
Media Database) stored on the HDD.
u The HDD has two types of playlists:
original playlists and user playlists. An
original playlist is automatically created
for each album when a music CD is
recorded. You can customize up to six
user playlists provided on the HDD by
adding tracks from your original playlists.
You can also select a track by the following
procedure.
1. Rotate
or press
to display the song
list.
2. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a track from the list.
232
1How to Select a Track from the Music Search List
You can control the HDD audio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 211
2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 244
Music tracks recorded on HDD cannot be recorded
onto CDs or other devices.
Tracks are recorded at four times the playback speed
using ultra-efficient compression technology;
therefore, sound quality may vary slightly from the
original.
If the HDD is ever replaced, all music data is lost and
cannot be recovered.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the display.
2 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio P. 257
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
233 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Albums: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first track in each album.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on HDD.
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track.
Interface Dial
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press
.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
1. Select Scan, Random, or Repeat.
2 Playing Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
P. 230
Random/Repeat is selected.
■ To turn off a play mode
Interface Dial
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press
On Demand Multi-Use Display
.
Features
2. Select a mode.
Random/Repeat
The following menu items vary depending on the
category you selected by the Music Search list.
Repeat Artist: Repeats all tracks in the current artist.
Repeat Album: Repeats all tracks in the current
album.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track.
Random in Artist: Plays all tracks in the current artist
in random order.
Random in Album: Plays all tracks in the current
album in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks in random order.
TM
1. Select Scan, Random, or Repeat.
2 Playing Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio P. 230
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
Continued
233
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
234 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
■ Editing an Album or Playlist
1Editing an Album or Playlist
Features
Change the playlist name, album name, genre, and track order of the current
playlist. You can also delete tracks, playlists, and albums.
■ Editing an album
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Albums, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate
to select an album that you want
to edit or delete, then press .
5. To edit an album name:
Rotate
to select Edit Name, then press
.
u Enter the name using the interface dial or
the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
To delete an album:
Rotate
to select Delete, then press
The maximum number of songs in each of the six
user playlists is 999. Adding new songs overwrites
the oldest songs.
The maximum number of original playlists is 999 with
a maximum of 99 songs in each playlist.
Each album CD counts as an original playlist. Adding
a track from a user playlist into the same user playlist
will cause the track to appear twice in the playlist.
Deleting an album (original playlist) also deletes the
album tracks you have stored in any user playlists.
Deleting a user playlist or deleting all tracks from a
user playlist does not remove the playlist folder.
The folder retains the playlist name and artist
information.
Icon
.
To edit track information or delete a track:
Rotate
to select List Tracks, then press
.
2 Editing Track Information P. 237
Select
234
to enter symbols.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
235 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
To delete a playlist:
Rotate
to select Delete, then press
Features
■ Editing a playlist
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Playlists, then press
.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate
to select a playlist that you want
to edit or delete, then press .
5. To edit a playlist name:
Rotate
to select Edit Name, then press
.
u Enter the name using the interface dial or
the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
.
To edit track information or delete a track:
Rotate
to select List Tracks, then press
.
2 Editing Track Information P. 237
Continued
235
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
236 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
■ Creating a new playlist
Features
236
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Playlists, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select Create New Playlist,
then press .
u Enter the name using the interface dial or
the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM,
then select tracks from the Music
Search list.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
237 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
■ Editing Track Information
To delete a track:
Rotate
to select Delete, then press
Features
Change the track title, artist name, genre and composer. You can also delete tracks.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Tracks, then press .
4. Rotate
to select a track you want to edit
or delete, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. To edit track information:
Rotate
to select Edit Name, then press
.
u Enter the track name, track artist, etc.
using the interface dial or the On
Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM. Move ,
rotate
to select OK, then press .
.
Continued
237
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
238 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
■ Displaying Music Information
Features
238
Music information (album name, artist name, genre) can be acquired by accessing
the Gracenote® Album Info.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Albums, then press .
4. Rotate
to select an album you want to
edit, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate
to select Edit Name, then press
.
6. Move to select Get Music Info, then
press .
u The system starts to access the
Gracenote® Album Info.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
239 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
■ Updating Gracenote® Album Info
To acquire updated files:
• Consult a dealer.
• U.S.: Visit www.acura.com.
• Canada: Visit www.acura.ca.
Once you perform an update, any information you
edited before will be overwritten or erased.
Features
Update the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote® Media Database) that is included
with the navigation system.
1. Insert the update disc into the disc slot or
connect the USB flash drive that includes
the update.
2. Press the SETTINGS button in the HDD
mode.
3. Move
or
to select the CD/HDD tab.
4. Rotate
to select Update Gracenote
Album Info, then press .
5. Rotate
to select Update by USB or
Update by CD, then press .
u The system starts updating and the
confirmation message appears on the
screen. Press
to finish.
1Updating Gracenote® Album Info
239
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
240 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod
mode.
2 USB Port P. 193
Audio/Information Screen
USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod is connected.
Album Art
Audio Source
Select to change an audio source.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Features
VOL (Volume) Knob (Pushed out)
Turn to adjust the volume.
Play/Pause Icon
Select to resume or play a song.
Shuffle
Select to use a shuffle feature.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item, then
press to set your selection.
Move up, down, right and left to select
secondary menu.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
240
Album Art Icon
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Repeat
Select to use a repeat feature.
Album Bar
Select to search for an album.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a song.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
241 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
■ How to Select an Album
1How to Select an Album
You can select albums in the category you selected by the Music Search list.
This function may not be available depending on
models or versions.
Select X to go back to the previous screen.
Select an album
image.
Select the album
bar.
Album Bar
Album Image
Features
1. Select the album bar.
u The image of the current album is displayed.
2. Select
or
icon to search for an album.
u When the album image you are looking for appears, select it to play.
Continued
241
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
242 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .
1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
You can control an iPod using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 211
2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 244
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 258
Features
3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a song from the Music Search list.
You can also select a song by the following
procedure.
1. Rotate
or press
to display the song
list.
2. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a song from the list.
242
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
243 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
Interface Dial
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Shuffle/Repeat, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press .
Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
1. Select Shuffle or Repeat.
2 Playing an iPod P. 240
2. Select a mode.
Features
■ To turn off a play mode
Interface Dial
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press
.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
1. Select Shuffle or Repeat.
2 Playing an iPod P. 240
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
243
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
244 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
Use SBV to search for and play music from your HDD or iPod using voice commands.
Setting options:
■ To enable SBV
• On (factory default): Song By VoiceTM commands
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Voice Reco
tab.
4. Rotate
to select Song by Voice, then
press .
5. Rotate
to select On or Off, then press
.
Features
244
1Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
are available.
• Off: Disable the feature.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
245 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
■ Searching for music using SBV
1Searching for music using SBV
Song By VoiceTM Commands List
2 Song By VoiceTM commands P. 213
NOTE:
Song By VoiceTM commands are available for tracks
stored on the HDD or iPod.
You can add phonetic modifications of difficult
words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists,
songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.
2 Phonetic Modification P. 246
Features
1. Set the Song by Voice setting to On.
2. Press the
(Talk) button and say “Music
Search” to activate the SBV feature for the
HDD and iPod.
3. Press the
button and say a command.
u Example 1: Say “(List) ‘Artist A’“ to view a
list of songs by that artist. Select the
desired song to start playing.
u Example 2: Say “Play ‘Artist A’“ to start
playing songs by that artist.
4. To cancel SBV, press the
(hang-up/back)
button on the steering wheel. The selected
song continues playing.
Once you have canceled this mode, you need
to press the
button and say “Music Search”
again to re-activate this mode.
Continued
245
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
246 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
■ Phonetic Modification
Features
246
Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV
to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when
searching for music on the HDD or iPod.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings,
then press .
3. Move
or
to select the Voice Reco
tab.
4. Rotate
to select Song by Voice
Phonetic Modification, then press .
5. Move and rotate
to select New
Modification, then press .
6. Rotate
to select HDD or iPod, then
press .
1Phonetic Modification
Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By
Voice is set to Off.
You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification
items.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
247 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
Features
7. Rotate
to select the item to modify
(e.g., Artist), then press .
u The list of the selected item appears on
the screen.
8. Rotate
to select an entry (e.g., No
Name), then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen.
u The listen to the current phonetic
modification, rotate
to select Play,
then press .
u To delete the current phonetic
modification, rotate
to select
Delete, then press .
9. Rotate
to select Modify, then press
.
10. Enter the phonetic spelling you wish to
use (e.g., “Artist A”) when prompted.
11. Move to select OK to exit.
u The artist “No Name” is phonetically
modified to “Artist A.” When in the SBV
mode, you can press the
(Talk)
button and use the voice command
“Play ‘Artist A’” to play songs by the
artist “No Name.”
247
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
248 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
Compatible phones only
Playing Internet Radio
Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.
iPhone
You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port.
Select Audio Source to select Pandora or Aha mode.
1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is currently available exclusively in the United States.
Audio/Information Screen
Album Art
Bluetooth® Indicator
Appears when your phone is
connected to HFL.
Audio Source
Select Pandora® or AhaTM.
USB Indicator
Appears when a phone is
connected.
Features
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
VOL (Volume) Knob (Pushed out)
Turn to adjust the volume.
Play/Pause Icon
Select to resume or play a song.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
Rating Icon
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Station Up/Down Icons
Select to change a station.
Skip Icon
Select to skip a song.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Like/Dislike Icons
Select to evaluate a song.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item, then press
to set your selection. Move up, down, right
and left to select secondary menu.
248
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
249 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
U.S. models
1Playing Internet Radio
■ Pandora® Menu
You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Skip Forward
• Bookmark Track
• Play/Pause
• Bookmark Artist
• Station List
• Change Source
• Like
• Sound
• Dislike
■ Operating a menu item
To select Change Source or Sound, press the
MENU button, then press .
Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that
selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user
enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio system,
it may be streaming through Bluetooth® Audio. Make sure
Pandora® mode on your audio system is selected.
Features
The menu items are shown in the lower half of
the audio/information screen.
Rotate
to select an item and press .
To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or call
1-888-528-7876.
1Pandora® Menu
You can control Pandora® using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 211
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 259
There are restrictions on the number of songs you
can skip or dislike in a given hour.
Continued
249
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
250 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
■ AhaTM Radio Menu
1AhaTM Radio Menu
You can operate some of the AhaTM menu items from your vehicle’s audio system.
The available items are:
• Like
• View text
• Dislike
• View list
• Play/Pause
• Reply
• 15sec Back
• Change Source
• 30sec Skip
• Stations
• Sound
■ Operating a menu item
Features
The menu items are shown in the lower half of
the audio/information screen.
Rotate
to select an item and press .
To select Sound, Change Source or
Stations, press the MENU button, then press
.
AhaTM by Harman is a cloud-based service that
organizes your favorite web content into live radio
stations. You can access podcasts, internet radio,
location-based services, and audio updates from
social media sites.
You can control AhaTM Radio using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 211
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 AhaTM Radio P. 260
The menu items vary depending on the station you
selected.
To use this service in your vehicle, the AcuraLink app
must be installed on your phone. Visit
owners.acura.com/apps for more information.
You must have a previously set up Aha account prior
to using the service in your vehicle. Visit
www.aharadio.com for more information.
250
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
251 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA, or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port P. 193
Audio/Information Screen
Audio Source
Select to change an audio source.
Scan
Select to use a scan feature.
Random
Select to use a random feature.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item, then press
to set your selection. Move up, down, right
and left to select secondary menu.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Features
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
VOL (Volume) Knob (Pushed out)
Turn to adjust the volume.
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is
connected.
Folder Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder,
and
to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder.
Repeat
Select to use a repeat feature.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a file.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Continued
251
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
252 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
You can control a USB flash drive using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 211
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 261
Files in WMA/AAC format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
Folder Selection
Features
3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a file from the Music Search list.
File Selection
252
You can also select a file by the following
procedure.
1. Rotate
or press
to display the song
list.
2. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a file from the list.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 258
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
253 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
Interface Dial
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
1. Select Scan, Random, or Repeat.
2 Playing a USB Flash Drive P. 251
Random/Repeat is selected.
2. Select a mode.
Interface Dial
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
Features
■ To turn off a play mode
.
.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
1. Select Scan, Random, or Repeat.
2 Playing a USB Flash Drive P. 251
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
253
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
254 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 299
Audio/Information
Screen
Audio Source
Select to change
an audio source.
Features
(Power) Button
Press to turn the
audio system on and
off.
VOL (Volume) Knob
(Pushed out)
Turn to adjust the
volume.
Pause Icon
Interface Dial/
ENTER Button
Press and turn to
select an item,
then press to set
your selection.
Move up, down,
right and left to
select secondary
menu.
254
Bluetooth® Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.
On Demand MultiUse DisplayTM
Folder Up/Down
Icons
Select
or
to
change folders.
Play Icon
More
Select to display
the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change files.
MENU Button
Press to display
the menu items.
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or call 1888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
You can control Bluetooth® Audio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 211
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
255 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone. This function may not be available
on some phones.
Features
■ To pause or resume a file
Interface Dial
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Play or Pause, then press
.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Select the play icon or pause icon.
■ Switching to HFL
1Switching to HFL
Press the
(pick-up) button on the steering
wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio
is playing.
If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the
pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 293
Press the
(hang-up/back) button to end
the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.
Button
Button
255
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
256 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Audio Error Messages
CD Player
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
Error Message
Unplayable File
Bad Disc
Please Check Owner’s
Manual
Push Eject
Cause
Track/file format not supported
Mechanical error
●
Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file
plays automatically.
●
Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the
error message is cleared.
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
disc again.
●
2 Protecting CDs P. 263
Mecha Error
Features
256
Solution
●
●
Bad Disc
Please Check Owner’s
Manual
Servo error
Check Disc
Disc error
Heat Error
High temperature
●
●
If the error message reappears, press the
button, and pull out
the disc.
Insert a different disc.
If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,
contact a dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2 Protecting CDs P. 263
●
Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
257 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio Error MessagesuHard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio
If an error occurs while playing the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Audio, you may see the
following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
HDD access error.
Please consult your dealer.
Solution
—
Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.
The navigation system temperature is too low. For
protection, the system will shut off until it warms up.
The navigation system has difficulty reading the HDD when the
temperature is below approximately -22°F (-30°C). The navigation
system starts up automatically when the display warms up.
Unplayable File
Appears when a file format not supported. Current track will be
skipped. The next supported track plays automatically.
Features
The display system temperature is too high. For protection,
the system will shut off until the display cools down.
257
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
258 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive
iPod/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Solution
Features
USB Error
Appears when there is a problem with the audio system. Check if the device is compatible with the
audio system.
Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s
Manual
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system
off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Unsupported Version
Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod is connected,
update the iPod software to the newer version.
Connect Retry
Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
Unplayable File
Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message
appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
iPod
Appears when the iPod is empty.
USB flash drive
No Data
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
drive.
iPod and USB flash drive
Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported
258
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
259 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
U.S. models
Pandora®
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Solution
Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s Manual
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect
the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it again. Do
not reconnect the device that caused the error.
No stations have been created.
Please create a station on the device.
Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device
to create a station.
Unable to save rating.
Unable to save bookmark
or
Unable to skip
Appears when the commanded operation is failed. Try again later.
No data
Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated.
Reboot the app and reconnect the device.
PANDORA Unsupported
Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update
Pandora® to the latest version.
PANDORA system maintenance
Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again
later.
Cannot connect to PANDORA. When stopped, make sure
PANDORA is running on the phone. For iPhone, set
connection priority to USB and reconnect.
Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your
device.
Features
Music licenses force us to limit the number of tracks you may Appears when you try to skip a song or select Dislike over the
skip each hour.
predetermined number of times in an hour.
259
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
260 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAudio Error MessagesuAhaTM Radio
AhaTM Radio
If an error occurs while playing AhaTM Radio, you may see the following error
messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Features
260
Error Message
Solution
Cannot connect to aha. When stopped, make sure aha is
running on the phone. For iPhone, set connection priority to
USB and reconnect.
Appears when the AhaTM app is not activated. Check your device.
Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s Manual
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect
the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it on again.
Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
261 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
General Information on the Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio Service
■ Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in
the display: Turn the interface dial until 0 appears.
2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the
SiriusXM® website to subscribe.
■ Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
■ SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages
Loading:
SiriusXM® is loading the audio or program information.
Ch off air:
The channel is not currently broadcasting.
Ch unauthorized:
SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network.
No signal:
The signal is too weak in the current location.
Ch unavailable:
No such channel exists, the channel is not part of your subscription, or the artist or
title information is unavailable.
Check antenna:
There is a problem with the SiriusXM® antenna. Contact a dealer.
Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:
• U.S.: SiriusXM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or
(800) 852-9696
• Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or
(877) 209-0079
1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;
therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause
satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are
more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you travel from the
equator.
You may experience reception problems under the
following circumstances:
• In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
• In tunnels
• On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
• Large items carried on the roof rack
Features
Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by pressing the SOURCE button repeatedly or
operating the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM, and stay in this mode for about 30
minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with
good reception.
1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
261
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
262 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
Recommended CDs
• Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.
• Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.
• Play only standard round-shaped CDs.
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.
Also includes:
Features
■ CDs with MP3, WMA or AAC files
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA or AAC formats may be unsupported.
262
1Recommended CDs
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded
under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not
play either.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos:
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the
Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks & DTS 2.0 Channel is a
trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software.
©DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
263 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uRecommended CDs
■ Protecting CDs
Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:
• Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.
• When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.
• Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.
• Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.
• Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.
• Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
• Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
1Protecting CDs
NOTICE
Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside
and damage the audio unit.
Examples:
●
Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
excessively thick CDs
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
●
Using
Printer Label
Kit
Sealed
With Plastic Ring
● Poor quality
Damaged CDs
CDs
Chipped/
Cracked
Small CDs
Warped
Features
●
With Label/
Sticker
Burrs
3-inch
(8-cm)
CD
263
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
264 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
■ iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
Model
iPod (5th generation)
iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)
iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)
iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) launch in 2012
iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) launch in 2012
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/iPhone 5
Features
264
■ USB Flash Drives
•
•
•
•
•
Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher.
Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.
1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
265 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Customized Features
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
1Customized Features
When you customize setting, make sure that the
vehicle is at a complete stop and shift to (P .
■ How to customize
Select your desired setting item by pressing the SETTINGS button, then rotating
while the power mode is ON, and the vehicle is at a complete stop. Press .
Audio/Information Screen
To customize other features, rotate
, move
or , and press .
2 List of customizable options P. 275
,
,
Features
SETTINGS Button
Continued
265
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
266 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
■ Customization flow
Press the SETTINGS button.
Display
System
Settings
Features
266
Default
Sound/
Beep
Bluetooth
Sync Display Brightness
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Guidance Volume
Interface Dial Feedback
Message Auto Reading
Verbal Reminder
Bluetooth Status
Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code
Voice
Reco
Guidance Volume
Voice Prompt
Song by Voice
Song by Voice Phonetic Modification
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Opening
Sound Volume
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
267 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Clock
Clock/Wallpaper
Type
Clock
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone *
Auto Daylight *
Clock Reset
Others
Features
* Not available on all models
Units
Language
Voice Command Tips
Background Color
Header Clock Display
System Device Information
Factory Data Reset
Continued
267
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
268 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Driver
Assist
System
Setup
Meter
Setup
Default
Driving
Position
Setup
Features
Vehicle
Settings
Keyless
Access
Setup
Lighting
Setup
268
* Not available on all models
Forward Collision Warning Distance
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep *
ACC Display Speed Unit *
Road Departure Mitigation Setting *
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep *
Blind Spot Info *
Language Selection
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Turn by Turn Display
Memory Position Link
Auto Tilt & Telescopic
Auto Seatbelt Tension *
Door Unlock Mode
Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep
Remote Start System On/Off *
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
269 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Door
Setup
Wiper
Setup
* Not available on all models
Wiper Action *
Front Wiper Action *
Maintenance Reset
Continued
Features
Maintenance Info.
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Auto Folding Door Mirror *
269
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
270 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Camera
Settings*1
Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Default
Camera
Settings*2
Rear
Camera
Features
Default
Cross Traffic Monitor
*1: Models with multi-view rear camera
*2: Models with multi-view rear camera and cross traffic monitor
270
Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
271 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Camera
Settings*3
MVCS
Default
Guidelines
Features
Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Automatically show
camera after reverse
Default camera mode in
forward
Default camera mode in
Preferences
reverse
Show camera when
decelerating
Clear parking guideline
automatically
Display
Cross Traffic Monitor
*3: Models with surround view camera system (MVCS)
Continued
271
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
272 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Audio
Settings
Recording from CD*1
Recording Quality*1
CD/HDD
HDD Info*1
Update Gracenote Album Info*1
Delete all HDD Data*1
Bluetooth
Features
Default
Bluetooth Device List*1
Connect Bluetooth Audio Device*1
Source Select Popup
Other
HD Radio Mode *, *1
Cover Art*1
*1: May change depending on your currently selected source.
272
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
273 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Phone
Connect Phone
Default
Bluetooth Device
List
Add Bluetooth
Device
Disconnect
Edit Bluetooth
Device
Add Bluetooth
Device
Phone
Settings
Default
Text/Email
Features
Edit Speed Dial
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
Use Contact Photo
Enable Text/Email
Select Account
New Text/Email Alert
Default
Continued
273
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
274 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Navi
Settings
Info
Settings
See the Navigation System Manual.
Features
AcuraLink
AcuraLink Msg Notice
Delete AcuraLink Message
AcuraLink Subscription Status
Clock
Clock/Wallpaper Type
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone *
Auto Daylight *
Clock Reset
Info Screen Preference
Default
Others
274
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
275 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
■ List of customizable options
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Selects whether the display brightness synchronizes
with the instrument panel brightness.
Brightness
Changes the brightness of the audio/information
screen.
—
Contrast
Changes the contrast of the audio/information screen.
—
Black Level
Changes the black level of the audio/information
screen.
—
Guidance Volume
Changes the volume of the audio speakers.
—
Interface Dial Feedback
Sets if and when the system reads aloud a
selection made using the Interface Dial.
On*1/Off/Auto
Message Auto Reading
Selects whether the system automatically reads
out messages, and, if selected, whether only
when driving.
On/Off/Auto*1
Verbal Reminder
Turns the verbal reminders on and off.
On*1/Off
Bluetooth Status
Turns the Bluetooth® on and off.
On*1/Off
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a
paired phone, and creates a security PIN.
On*1/Off
Features
Sound/
Beep
Selectable Settings
Sync Display Brightness
Display
System
Settings
Description
—
2 Phone Setup P. 299
Edit Pairing Code
Changes a pairing code.
2 To change the pairing code setting P. 301
Random/Fixed*1
*1:Default Setting
Continued
275
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
276 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Voice
Reco
Features
System
Settings
Opening
Description
Guidance Volume
Changes the volume of the voice prompt.
Voice Prompt
Turns the voice prompt on and off.
On*1/Off
Song by Voice
Turns the Song By VoiceTM on and off.
On*1/Off
Song by Voice Phonetic
Modification
Modifies a voice command for music stored in
the HDD or an iPod.
Phonebook Phonetic
Modification
Modifies a voice command for the phonebook.
Sound Volume
Changes the volume of the system’s startup sound.
Clock
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 244
—
—
2 Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 314
Changes the clock display type.
●
●
Changes the wallpaper type.
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 207
Clock Adjustment
—
2 Phonetic Modification P. 246
●
Wallpaper
Clock
276
Selectable Settings
—
Analog/Digital*1/
Small Digital/Off
Blank/Galaxy*1/
Metallic
Adjusts Clock.
—
2 Clock P. 114
Clock Format
Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H.
12H*1/24H
Auto Time Zone *
Sets the navigation system to automatically adjust
the clock when driving through different time zones.
On*1/Off
*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
277 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Selectable Settings
Auto Daylight *
Sets the navigation system to automatically adjust
the clock (“spring ahead” or “fall back” by one
hour) when a daylight saving time change occurs.
Clock Reset
Resets the settings of all items in the Clock group.
Units *
Changes the distance unit on the navigation map
screen.
miles*1/km (U.S.)
miles/km*1 (Canada)
Language
Changes the display language.
English*1/French/
Spanish
Voice Command Tips
Alerts you when manual control of the system is
disabled to prevent distraction while driving. Only
voice commands are available.
On*1/Off
Background Color
Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen and the On Demand MultiUse DisplayTM.
Blue*1/Amber/Red/
Green
Header Clock Display
Selects whether the clock display comes on.
On/Off*1
System Device Information
Displays the system/device information.
Clock
Others
Factory Data Reset
Default
*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models
Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 289
Cancels /Resets all customized items in the
System Settings group as default.
On*1/Off
—
Features
System
Settings
Description
—
—
Default/OK
Continued
277
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
278 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup
Group
Features
Vehicle
Settings
Customizable Features
Driver
Assist
System
Setup
Selectable Settings
Forward Collision Warning
Distance
Changes at which distance FCW * or CMBSTM*
alerts, or turns FCW * on and off.
Long/Normal*1/
Short/Off
ACC Forward Vehicle
Detect Beep *
Causes the system to beep when the system
detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of
the ACC with LSF range.
On/Off*1
ACC Display Speed Unit *
Changes the speed unit for ACC with LSF on the
multi-information display.
mph*1/km/h
(U.S.)
mph/km/h*1
(Canada)
Road Departure Mitigation
Setting *
Changes the setting for the road departure
mitigation system.
Normal*1/Wide/
Warning Only
Lane Keeping Assist
Suspend Beep *
Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is
suspended.
On/Off*1
Blind Spot Info *
Changes the setting for the blind spot
information.
Audible And Visual
Alert*1/Visual Alert/
Off
*1:Default Setting
278
Description
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
279 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup
Group
Vehicle
Settings
Customizable Features
Meter
Setup
Description
Selectable Settings
Changes the displayed language on the multiinformation display.
English*1/French/
Spanish
Adjust Outside Temp.
Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few
degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C
(Canada)
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,
average fuel economy A, average speed A, and
elapsed time A.
When Refueled/IGN
Off/Manually
Reset*1
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,
average fuel economy B, average speed B, and
elapsed time B.
When Refueled/IGN
Off/Manually
Reset*1
Turn by Turn Display
Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes
on during the route guidance.
On*1/Off
Features
Language Selection
*1:Default Setting
Continued
279
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
280 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Driving
Position
Setup
Features
Vehicle
Settings
Keyless
Access
Setup
Lighting
Setup
Selectable Settings
Memory Position Link
Turns the driving position memory system on and off.
On*1/Off
Auto Tilt & Telescopic
Moves the steering wheel fully up when you get
in/get out of the vehicle.
On*1/Off
Auto Seatbelt Tension *
Turns the auto seatbelt tension setting for the
seat belt e-pretensioner on and off.
On*1/Off
Door Unlock Mode
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.
Driver Door Only*1/
All Doors
Keyless Access Light Flash
Causes some exterior lights to flash when you
unlock/lock the doors.
On*1/Off
Keyless Access Beep
Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/
lock the doors.
On*1/Off
Remote Start System On/
Off *
Turns the remote engine start feature on and off.
On*1/Off
Interior Light Dimming
Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors.
60seconds/30seconds*1/
15seconds
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver’s door.
60seconds/30seconds/
15seconds*1/0seconds
Auto Light Sensitivity
Changes the timing for the headlights to come
on.
Max/High/Mid*1/
Low/Min
*1:Default Setting
280
Description
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
281 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
With Vehicle Speed*1/
Shift from P/Off
Auto Door Unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically unlock.
All Doors When
Driver’s Door Opens*1/
All Doors When
Shifted to Park/All
Doors When Ignition
Switched Off/Off
Key And Remote Unlock
Mode
Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to
unlock on the first push of the remote.
Driver Door*1/All
Doors
Keyless Lock Answer Back
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
On*1/Off
Security Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock
and the security system to set after you unlock
the vehicle without opening any door.
90seconds/
60seconds/
30seconds*1
Auto Folding Door Mirror *
Changes how you can fold the door mirrors.
Auto Fold With
Keyless*1/Manual Only
Wiper Action *
Changes the setting for the automatic
intermittent wipers in the AUTO position.
Rain Sensing*1/
Intermittent/Speed
Sensitive
Front Wiper Action *
Changes the setting for the wipers in the INT
position.
Speed Sensitive*1/
Intermittent
Wiper
Setup
Features
Vehicle
Settings
Selectable Settings
Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically lock.
Auto Door Lock
Door
Setup
Description
*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models
Continued
281
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
282 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup
Group
Vehicle
Settings
Customizable Features
Maintenance
Info.
Maintenance Reset
Features
Camera
Settings
Models with
multi-view
rear camera
and cross
traffic
monitor
Rear
Camera
Camera
Settings
282
Resets the engine oil life display when you have
performed the maintenance service.
—
Default/OK
Fixed Guideline
Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the
rear camera monitor.
On*1/Off
Dynamic Guideline
Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on
the rear camera monitor.
On*1/Off
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Camera Settings group as default.
Default/OK
Fixed Guideline
Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the
rear camera monitor.
On*1/Off
Dynamic Guideline
Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on
the rear camera monitor.
On*1/Off
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear
Camera group as default.
Default/OK
Turns the cross traffic monitor feature on and off.
On*1/Off
Cross Traffic Monitor
*1:Default Setting
Selectable Settings
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Vehicle Settings group as default.
Default
Models with
multi-view
rear camera
Description
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
283 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Description
Selectable Settings
Fixed
Guideline
Sets whether to turn on the reference line
display.
On*1/Off
Dynamic
Guideline
Sets whether to turn on the projection line
display.
On*1/Off
Automatically
show camera
after reverse
Sets the rear view to be automatically switched to
the front view when the shift lever is moved out
of (R .
On*1/Off
Default
camera mode
in forward
Selects which screen to display when the
surround view camera system is turned on while
the vehicle is moving forward.
Front Ground
View*1/Last Used/
Front Blind View/
Side View
Default
camera mode
in reverse
Sets which screen to display when the surround
view camera system is turned on while the vehicle
is reversing.
Rear Ground View*1/
Last Used/Rear
View/Rear Wide
View
Guidelines
Models with
surround view
camera system
(MVCS)
MVCS
Preferences
Features
Camera
Settings
*1:Default Setting
Continued
283
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
284 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup
Group
Models with
surround view
camera system
(MVCS)
Customizable Features
Features
Camera
Settings
Default
Cross Traffic Monitor
*1:Default Setting
284
Selectable Settings
Show camera
when
decelerating
Sets the screen to automatically return to the
camera view at vehicle speeds of 7 mph (12 km/
h) or lower. The screen can return only when the
display has been switched to the audio/
information screen at the vehicle speed of over 9
mph (15 km/h).
On*1/Off
Clear parking
guidance
automatically
Turns the parking guide lines on and off.
On*1/Off
Display
Adjusts the screen’s preferences.
Preferences
MVCS
Description
—
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Camera Settings group as default.
Default/OK
Turns the cross traffic monitor feature on and off.
On*1/Off
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
285 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
CD mode
Recording from CD
CD mode
Recording Quality
HDD mode
CD/HDD
HDD Info
CD or HDD mode
Audio
Settings
HDD mode
Delete All HDD Data
Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® * or
AhaTM mode
Bluetooth Device List
Bluetooth
Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® * or
AhaTM mode
Connect Bluetooth Audio
Device
Selectable Settings
Selects whether the songs on music CDs are
automatically recorded to the HDD.
Auto*1/Manual
Selects the quality of the music files recorded
to the HDD.
Standard*1/High
Displays the HDD capacity.
Updates the Gracenote® Album Info
(Gracenote® Media Database).
2 Deleting all HDD Data P. 290
—
Update by USB*1/
Update by CD
Features
Update Gracenote Album
Info
Description
—
Edits or deletes a Bluetooth® Audio device
paired to HFL.
—
Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
Audio device to HFL.
—
*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models
Continued
285
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
286 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Source Select Popup
Other
Audio
Settings
AM/FM mode
HD Radio Mode *
CD (MP3/WMA/AAC), iPod, USB,
Pandora® * or AhaTM mode
Description
Selectable Settings
Features
Selects whether the list of selectable audio
sources comes on when the AUDIO button is
pressed.
On/Off*1
Selects whether the audio system automatically
switches to the digital radio waves or receives the
analogue waves only.
Auto*1/Analog
Turns on and off the cover art display.
On*1/Off
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio
Settings group as default.
Default/OK
Cover Art
Default
Connect phone
Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or
disconnects a paired phone.
—
2 Phone Setup P. 299
Phone
Settings
Phone
Bluetooth Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone, or creates a security PIN.
—
2 Phone Setup P. 299
Edit Speed Dial
*1:Default Setting
286
* Not available on all models
Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.
2 Phone Setup P. 299
—
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
287 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Phone
Text/
Email
Default
Selectable Settings
Auto Transfer
Sets calls to automatically transfer from your
phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
On*1/Off
Auto Answer
Sets whether to automatically answer an
incoming call after about four seconds.
On/Off*1
Ring Tone
Selects the ring tone.
Fixed/Mobile
Phone*1/Off
Automatic Phone Sync
Sets a phonebook data to be automatically
imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
On*1/Off
Use Contact Photo
Displays a caller’s picture on an incoming call
screen.
On*1/Off
Enable Text/Email
Turns the text/e-mail message function on and
off.
On*1/Off
Select Account
Selects a text/e-mail message account.
New Text/Email Alert
Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the
screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail
message.
On/Off*1
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone
Settings group as default.
Default/OK
Features
Phone
Settings
Description
—
*1:Default Setting
Continued
287
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
288 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized Featuresu
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Acura
Link
Description
Selectable Settings
AcuraLink Msg Notice
Selects whether newly received AcuraLink
messages to be displayed.
Delete AcuraLink Message
Deletes AcuraLink messages.
—
AcuraLink Subscription Status
Displays your current AcuraLink subscription status.
—
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
On*1/Off
Clock
Wallpaper
Features
Clock Adjustment
Info
Settings
Clock
Clock Format
See System Settings on P. 275 to P. 277.
Auto Time Zone *
Auto Daylight *
Clock Reset
Other
Info Screen Preference
Default
*1:Default Setting
288
* Not available on all models
Selects the top menu when the INFO button is
pressed.
● Info Top- A brief menu pops up.
● Info Menu- A full menu pops up.
● Off- A menu does not pop up.
Info Top/Info
Menu*1/Off
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info
Settings group as default.
Default/OK
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
289 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
Defaulting All the Settings
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
The following settings will be reset:
• Routing & Guidance: Rerouting, Unverified Area
Routing, Traffic Rerouting, Edit Waypoint Search
Area, Guidance Mode, Street Name Guidance
• Route Preference
• Audio preset settings
• Phonebook entries
• Other display and each item settings.
Features
You can reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Others tab.
4. Rotate
to select Factory Data Reset,
then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
6. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
again to reset the settings.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Press
to select OK.
289
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
290 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCustomized FeaturesuDeleting all HDD Data
Deleting all HDD Data
You can reset all the menu and customized settings, and delete all music data on the
HDD.
1. Turn on the audio system and select the
HDD mode.
2. Press the SETTINGS button.
3. Rotate
to select Audio Settings, then
press .
4. Move
or
to select the CD/HDD tab.
5. Rotate
to select Delete all HDD Data,
then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
6. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
Features
290
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
291 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three
remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or
home security systems.
■ Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that
the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety
information, contact the manufacturer.
1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls., Inc.
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage
door opener, confirm that the opener has an external
entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic
eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it
does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the
way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
Features
When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s
path.
Training HomeLink
Red Indicator
If you have not trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase any
previously learned codes. To do this:
• Press and hold the two outside buttons for
about 20 seconds, until the red indicator
blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to
step 1.
• If you are training the second or third
button, go directly to step 1.
Continued
291
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
292 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuHomeLink® Universal TransceiveruTraining HomeLink
■ Training a Button
1Training HomeLink
1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the
HomeLink button you want to program.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the button on
the remote transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED)
blink after 10 secs?
NO
YES
Retraining a Button
If you want to retrain a programmed button for a
new device, you do not have to erase all button
memory. You can replace the existing memory code
using this procedure:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button
until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.
NO
Standard transmitter
Features
3. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink
button for about a sec.
Does the device (garage
door opener) work?
YES
YES
a. Press and hold the remote and the HomeLink
button at the same time. Then, while
continuing to hold the HomeLink button,
press and release the button on the remote
every 2 secs.
Does the LED blink within 20 secs?
NO
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
Training
Complete
HomeLink LED
is on.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink
button again.
The remote-controlled device
should operate.
Training Complete
292
HomeLink indicator blinks for 2 secs,
then remains on.
a. The remote has a rolling code. Press the
“learn” button on the remote-controlled
device (e.g. garage door opener).
b. Within 30 secs, press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.
Indicator remains on
for about 25 secs.
Rolling code transmitter
Indicator blinks rapidly for
2 secs, then remains on for
about 23 secs.
2. Continue to hold the HomeLink button and
follow steps 1 - 3 under “Training a Button.”
Erasing Codes
To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside
buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink
(about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes
before selling the vehicle.
If you have any problems, see the device’s
instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call
HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
293 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s navigation system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
■ HFL Buttons
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or call 1888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876.
Volume up
To use HFL, the Bluetooth setting must be On.
2 Customized Features P. 265
Microphone
Pick-up
Button
Voice control tips:
Volume down
Hang-up/Back Button
Talk Button
PHONE
Button
Interface
Dial
(Pick-up) button: Press to go to the Speed Dial/Call History on the multiinformation display or to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call, to cancel a command or to clear
the phone information on the multi-information display.
(Talk) button: Press to give HFL voice commands.
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Interface dial: Rotate
to select an item on the screen, then press . Move ,
, or to select secondary menu.
Continued
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
• Press and release the
button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag, a
phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and
naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, use the audio system’s
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.
Features
• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
293
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
294 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
■ HFL Status Display
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Bluetooth® Indicator
Battery Level
Status
Comes on when your
phone is connected to HFL.
Roam Status
HFL Mode
Signal Strength
Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
Features
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
■ Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or
inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until
the vehicle is stopped.
Disabled Option
Only previously stored speed dial entries with
voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers
can be called using voice commands while the
vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 311
294
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 265
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
295 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use HFL.
1HFL Menus
■ Phone Settings screen
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.
(Existing entry list) Connect a phone to the system.
Add Bluetooth
Device
Disconnect
Pair a phone to the system.
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Edit Device
Name
(Existing
entry list)*1
Bluetooth
Device List
Add Bluetooth
Device
Edit the user name of a paired phone.
Replace This
Device
Create a security PIN for a paired phone.
Replace a previously paired phone with a
new phone.
Delete This
Device
Delete a previously paired phone.
Edit PIN
Features
Phone
Connect
Phone*1
Pair a phone to the system.
*1: Appears when a phone has already been paired to HFL.
Continued
295
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
296 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Delete All
Delete all the previously stored speed dial numbers.
Enter a phone number to store as a speed
dial number.
Import from Select a phone number from the call
Call History history to store as a speed dial number.
Import from Select a phone number from the
Phonebook phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Manual Input
Edit Speed
Dial*1
New Entry
Edit
(Existing
entry list)
●
●
Delete
Features
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync*1
Use Contact Photo
Default
Enable Text/Email
Text/Email
*1
Select Account
New Text/Email Alert
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
296
Edit a previously stored speed dial number.
Change a number.
Create or delete a voice tag.
Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the
vehicle.
Set whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four
seconds.
Select the ring tone.
Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to
HFL.
Display a caller’s picture on an incoming call screen.
Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.
Turn the text/e-mail message function on and off.
Select a text/e-mail message account.
Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new
text/e-mail message.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
297 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Phone screen
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
Dial*1
Features
Phonebook*1
Enter a phone number to dial.
Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
Manual Input
New Entry
Import from
Call History
Import from
Phonebook
Speed Dial*1
Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a
speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a
speed dial number.
(Existing entry list)
Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
More Speed Dials
Display another paired phone’s speed dial list.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Continued
297
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
298 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Redial*1
Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
All
Call History*1
Dialed
Received
Missed
Roadside Assistance*1
Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Display the last 20 missed calls.
Makes a call to the number for the Roadside Assistance service.
(Read/Stop)
Features
Select a message
and press .
Message is
read aloud.
Text/Email*1
Previous
System reads received message aloud, or stop message
from being read.
See the previous message.
Next
See the next message.
Reply
Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases.
Call
Make a call to the sender.
Select Account Select a mail or text message account.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
298
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
299 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no
Continued
Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
connected to HFL.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
Features
phone paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
3. Make sure your phone is search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, move
to select Phone not Found? and
search for Bluetooth devices using your
phone. From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone
Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call
history and phonebook automatically imported to
HFL.
2 Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting P. 310
299
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
300 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has
Features
300
already been paired to the system)
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Connect Phone, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Add
Bluetooth Device.
5. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
6. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, move
to select Phone not Found? and
search for Bluetooth devices using your
phone. From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
7. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
8. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
301 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Bluetooth tab.
4. Rotate
to select Edit Pairing Code,
then press .
5. Rotate
to select Fixed or Random,
then press .
1To change the pairing code setting
The pairing code may be six or four digits depending
on your phone.
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.
Features
Continued
301
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
302 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To replace an already-paired phone
Features
302
with a new phone
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
5. Rotate
to select a paired phone you
want to replace, then press .
6. Rotate
to select Replace This Device,
then press .
7. HFL enters the pairing process and searches
a new phone.
u Follow the prompts to pair a new phone.
8. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone
The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial
entries, and security PIN information from the
previously paired phone.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
303 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ To delete a paired phone
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
5. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .
6. Rotate
to select Delete This Device,
then press .
7. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
8. You will receive a notification on the screen
if it is successful.
303
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
304 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To Set Up a Text/E-mail Message Options
■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail
Features
message function
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Text/Email
tab.
4. Rotate
to select Enable Text/Email,
then press .
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate
to select On or Off, then press
.
■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail
message notice
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Text/Email
tab.
4. Rotate
to select New Text/Email
Alert, then press .
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate
to select On or Off, then press
.
304
1To Set Up a Text/E-mail Message Options
To use the text/e-mail message function, you need a
Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of
compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special
feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or call 1888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876.
1To turn on or off the text/e-mail message notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
305 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To set up the auto reading option
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Sound/Beep
tab.
4. Rotate
to select Message Auto
Reading, then press .
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate
to select On, Off or Auto, then
press .
1To set up the auto reading option
On: A text/e-mail message is always read aloud.
Off: A text/e-mail message is not read aloud.
Auto: A text/e-mail message is read aloud only when
driving.
Features
Continued
305
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
306 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To Create a Security PIN
Features
You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
5. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
add a security PIN to, then press .
6. Rotate
to select Edit PIN, then press .
7. Enter a new four-digit number.
Audio/information screen
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
306
1To Create a Security PIN
u Audio/information screen
Rotate
to select, then press .
Move
to delete. Rotate
to select
OK to enter the security PIN.
u On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
You can also enter a number using the
icons.
8. Re-enter the four-digit number.
u The screen returns to the screen in step
4.
If the phone is already security PIN protected, you
need to enter the current security PIN before clearing
the PIN or creating a new one.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
307 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Editing User Name
Edit the user name of a paired phone as
follows:
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
5. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
edit, then press .
6. Rotate
to select Edit Device Name,
then press .
7. Enter a new name of the phone.
Audio/information screen
Icon
Select
to enter symbols.
Features
Audio/information screen
1Editing User Name
u Audio/information screen
Rotate
to select, then press .
Move
to delete. Rotate
or move
to select OK then press
to enter the
name.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
u On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
You can also enter a name using the
icons.
Continued
307
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
308 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Auto Transfer, then
press .
5. Rotate
to select On, then press .
Features
■ Auto Answer
You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Auto Answer, then
press .
5. Rotate
to select On, then press .
308
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
309 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Ring Tone
1Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Ring Tone, then press
.
5. Rotate
to select Fixed, Mobile Phone
or Off, then press .
You can display a caller’s picture on an incoming call screen.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Use Contact Photo,
then press .
5. Rotate
to select On or Off, then press
.
Continued
Features
■ Use Contact Photo
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.
Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the
connected cell phone sounds from the speaker.
Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.
309
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
310 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
■ When Automatic Phone Sync is set to
On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to HFL.
■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
Features
310
setting
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Automatic Phone
Sync, then press .
5. Rotate
to select On or Off, then press
.
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
Pref
Fax
Home
Car
Mobile
Other
Work
Message
Pager
Voice
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
311 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Speed Dial
1Speed Dial
Continued
When a voice tag is stored, press the
button to
call the number using the voice tag. Say “Call” and
the voice tag name.
Features
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
u Repeat the procedure to select New
Entry.
4. Rotate
to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
From Import from Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
u Input the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
u Select a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
5. When the speed dial is successfully stored
from Import from Call History or Import
from Phonebook, you are asked to create
a voice tag for the number. Rotate
to
select Yes or No, then press .
6. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.
311
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
312 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed
Features
312
dial number
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Edit Speed Dial, then
press .
5. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Edit, then press .
6. Rotate
to select Voice Tag, then press
.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Record, then press .
7. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
313 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■ To delete a voice tag
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Edit Speed Dial, then
press .
5. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Edit, then press .
6. Rotate
to select Voice Tag, then press
.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Clear, then press .
7. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
■ To delete a speed dial
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Phone tab.
4. Rotate
to select Edit Speed Dial, then
press .
5. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Delete, then press .
6. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
Continued
313
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
314 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Features
314
Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone’s contact name so that
it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.
■ To add a new voice tag
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Voice Reco
tab.
4. Rotate
to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
5. Rotate
to select the phone you want to
add phonetic modification to, then press
.
1Phonebook Phonetic Modification
You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
315 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
6. Rotate
to select New Voice Tag, then
press .
7. Move
or
and rotate
to select a
contact name, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
8. Rotate
to select Modify, then press .
9. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
10.You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen. Rotate
to select OK, then
press .
Features
Continued
315
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
316 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To modify a voice tag
Features
316
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Voice Reco
tab.
4. Rotate
to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
5. Rotate
to select the phone you want to
add phonetic modification to, then press
.
6. Rotate
to select a contact name you
want to modify, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
7. Rotate
to select Modify, then press .
8. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
9. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select OK, then
press .
1Phonebook Phonetic Modification
You can only modify or delete contact names for the
currently connected phone.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
317 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■ To delete a modified voice tag
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Voice Reco
tab.
4. Rotate
to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
5. Rotate
to select the phone you want to
delete phonetic modification, then press
.
6. Rotate
to select a contact name you
want to delete, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
7. Rotate
to select Delete, then press .
8. Move and rotate
to select OK, then
press .
317
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
318 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To delete all modified voice tags
Features
318
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Voice Reco
tab.
4. Rotate
to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
5. Rotate
to select the phone you want to
delete phonetic modification, then press
.
u The contact name list appears.
6. Move and rotate
to select Delete All,
then press .
7. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
319 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Making a Call
1Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
redial.
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,
or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.
Press the
button and say “Call” and the voice tag
name, “Call by name” and the phonebook name, or
“Call” and the phone number.
The maximum range between your phone and
vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
Features
Continued
319
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
320 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To make a call using the imported
Features
320
phonebook
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Phonebook, then
press .
4. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Move to Search.
u You can use the keyboard on the touch
screen for an alphabetical search.
5. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number, phonebook name, or number using
voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 294
2 Speed Dial P. 311
You can use the keyboard on the On Demand MultiUse DisplayTM for an alphabetical search.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
321 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Dial, then press .
4. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
5. Rotate
to select
, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number, phonebook name, or number using
voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 294
2 Speed Dial P. 311
You can use the keyboard on the On Demand MultiUse DisplayTM to input numbers.
Select numbers, then
to start dialing.
.
Continued
Features
■ To make a call using redial
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Redial, then press
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using a phone number
321
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
322 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Call History, then
press .
4. Move
or
to select All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
5. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
Features
On multi-information display
Mr.AAA
111AAA####
Mr.BBB
322
Steering switches
1. Press the
button.
2. Move the left selector wheel right to select
Call History.
3. Roll the left selector wheel to select a
number.
4. Push the left selector wheel or the
button.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
These icons next to the number indicate the
following:
: Dialed calls.
: Received calls.
: Missed calls.
Steering switches
The call history displays the last 12 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
323 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
On multi-information display
111AAA####
Mr.BBB
Move to select More Speed Dials to view another
paired phone’s speed dial list. You can make a call
from that list using the currently connected phone.
When a voice tag is stored, press the
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 311
button to
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name
or number can be dialed by voice from any screen.
Press the
button and follow the prompts.
Steering switches
1. Press the
button.
2. Move the left selector wheel left to select
Speed Dial.
3. Roll the left selector wheel to select a
number.
4. Push the left selector wheel or the
button.
u Dialing starts automatically.
Continued
Steering switches
The speed dial displays the 20 speed dial entries.
Features
Mr.AAA
1To make a call using a speed dial entry
323
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
324 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming call screen appears.
Press the
Press the
button to answer the call.
button to decline or end the call.
Call Waiting
Press the
button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the
button again to return to the current
call.
Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer
it.
Press the
button if you want to hang up the
current call.
You can select the icons on the On Demand Multiand
buttons.
Use DisplayTM instead of the
Features
324
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
325 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menudriven phone system.
The available options are shown on the Phone
Mute Icon
screen.
10
Rotate
to select the option, then press .
John
u
The
mute
icon appears when Mute is
01’23
0123456789####
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
You can select the icons on the On Demand MultiUse DisplayTM.
Features
Continued
325
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
326 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Receiving a Text/E-mail Message
Features
326
HFL can display newly received text/e-mail messages as well as 20 of the most
recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be
read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text/e-mail message.
2. Rotate
to select Read to listen to the
message, then press .
u The text/e-mail message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, press
.
1Receiving a Text/E-mail Message
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text/e-mail messages.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text/
e-mail message feature. Only use the text/e-mail
message feature when conditions allow you to do so
safely.
When you receive a text/e-mail message for the first
time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked
to turn the New Text/Email Alert setting to On.
2 To turn on or off the text/e-mail message
notice P. 304
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
327 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Selecting a Mail Account
1Selecting a Mail Account
You can also select a mail account from the folder list
screen or the message list screen.
Move to select Select Account, then press .
Features
If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to
be active and receive notifications.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
3. Move
or
to select the Text/Email
tab.
4. Rotate
to select Select Account, then
press .
5. Rotate
to select Text Messages or an
e-mail account you want, then press .
You can only receive notifications from one text
message or mail account at a time.
Continued
327
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
328 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Displaying Messages
Message List
Features
328
Text Message
1Displaying Messages
■ Displaying text messages
The
icon appears next to an unread message.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then press
.
u Select account if necessary.
4. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.
To see the previous or next message, move
on the text message screen.
or
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
329 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Folder List
Message List
■ Displaying e-mail messages
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select a folder, then press .
5. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The e-mail is displayed. The system
automatically starts reading the message
aloud.
1Displaying e-mail messages
Received text/e-mail messages may appear in the
message list screen at the same time. In this case, text
messages are titled No subject.
Features
E-mail
Continued
329
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
330 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Read or stop reading a message
1. Go to the text/e-mail message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 328
2. Press
to stop reading.
Press
again to start reading the message
from the beginning.
■ Reply to a message
Features
1. Go to the text/e-mail message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 328
2. Move and rotate
to select Reply,
then press .
3. Rotate
to select the reply message, then
press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Send to send the message.
u Message sent appears on the screen
when the reply message was successfully
sent.
330
1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
• Talk to you later, I’m driving.
• I’m on my way.
• I’m running late.
• OK
• Yes
• No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
331 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying text messages P. 328
2. Move
press
and rotate
.
to select Call, then
Features
Continued
331
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
332 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Roadside Assistance *
Provides a nationwide service for unexpected incidents. You can call for assistance
using a phone paired and connected to Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®.
1. From the Phone screen, press the MENU
button.
2. Rotate
to select Roadside Assistance,
then press .
3. Rotate
to select a phone number, then
press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
Features
332
* Not available on all models
1Roadside Assistance *
If you are subscribed to a paid AcuraLink package,
you can call the roadside assistance using the LINK
button instead of your phone.
2 AcuraLink® P. 333
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
333 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
AcuraLink®
Is a subscription-based service that provides convenient features such as voice
communication in case of emergency, online security, one-on-one operator
assistance, and the transmission of important messages regarding your vehicle’s
status.
For information on traffic rerouting and traffic information updates, provided by the
AcuraLink server, see the Navigation System Manual.
■ In Case of Emergency
■ Automatic collision notification
When connected to the AcuraLink
operator:
AcuraLink also provides services you can operate
from the Internet or your smartphone.
To subscribe to AcuraLink, or to get more
information about all of its features, contact an Acura
dealer, or visit owners.acura.com (in U.S.) or
www.acura.ca (in Canada).
1In Case of Emergency
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit
detects that the vehicle is severely impacted,
your vehicle automatically will attempt to
connect to the AcuraLink operator. Once
connected, information about your vehicle, its
positioning, and its condition will be sent to
the operator; you also can speak to the
operator when connected.
Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator
if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected or you
do not have adequate cellular coverage.
You cannot use emergency services when:
• You travel outside the AcuraLink service coverage areas.
• There is a problem with the connecting devices,
such as the ASSIST button, microphone, speakers,
or the unit itself.
• You are not subscribed to the service or your
subscription is no longer valid.
Features
Audio/information screen
1AcuraLink®
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
You cannot operate other navigation- or phonerelated functions using the screens while talking to
the operator.
Only the operator can terminate the connection to
your vehicle.
1Automatic collision notification
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
repeatedly tries until it succeeds.
Continued
333
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
334 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAcuraLink®u
■ Manual operator connection
ASSIST
Button
Features
334
1Manual operator connection
If you need to talk to the AcuraLink operator
in an emergency situation, you can manually
connect to them by pressing the ASSIST
button with the power mode in ACCESSORY
or ON.
1. Open the cover attached to the ceiling
console.
2. Press the ASSIST button.
u You are connected to the AcuraLink
operator.
Do not press the button while driving. When you
need to contact the operator, park the vehicle in a
safe place.
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
automatically cancels the action after three minutes.
In an emergency, the cover can be broken through to
press the ASSIST button.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
335 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAcuraLink®u
■ Security Features
1Security Features
Your subscribed telematics service provider can track your vehicle’s location,
remotely lock or unlock doors, and help you find your vehicle.
To use these features, you need your user ID and personal identification number
(PIN).
The contact information of your provider, your user
ID and PIN will be given when you subscribe to
AcuraLink. If you forget any of the above, contact a
dealer, or go to owners.acura.com (in U.S.) or
www.acura.ca (in Canada).
■ Stolen vehicle tracking
This feature searches and tracks down your vehicle position even if it is on the move.
If you believe that your vehicle has been stolen, contact the police as well as the
provider.
You can also activate the remote door lock/unlock
and vehicle finder features from the Internet or using
your smartphone app. Ask a dealer, or visit
owners.acura.com (in U.S.) or www.acura.ca (in
Canada) for details.
■ Vehicle finder
This feature is convenient to use when trying to locate your vehicle in large areas,
such as a crowded parking lot. If you cannot locate your vehicle after using the
remote transmitter’s answerback function, you can contact the provider which can
then flash your vehicle’s exterior lights and sound the horn.
■ Security alarm notification
If the security system in your vehicle detects an abnormal condition, such as
someone tampering with the lock on your vehicle, the provider notifies you by email.
Continued
Features
■ Remote door lock/unlock
The provider can remotely lock or unlock doors upon your request.
1Vehicle finder
The lights will stop flashing and horn will stop
sounding under the following conditions:
• When 30 seconds have elapsed.
• You unlock the doors using the remote transmitter.
• You unlock the doors using the keyless access
system.
• You unlock the doors using the built-in key.
• The power mode is set to ACCESSORY or ON.
335
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
336 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAcuraLink®u
■ Operator Assistance
1Operator Assistance
Connect to the AcuraLink operator when trying to find a destination or for roadside
assistance.
1. Press the LINK button.
u Connection to the operator begins.
LINK Button
Features
2. Talk to the operator.
u To disconnect, press the selector knob,
select End Call on the On Demand
Multi-Use DisplayTM, or press the Hangup button.
Audio/information screen
when connected to the
AcuraLink operator.
336
Remain attentive to road conditions and driving
during operator assistance.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
337 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAcuraLink®u
■ AcuraLink Message
Message Icon
1AcuraLink Message
AcuraLink sends you messages on vehicle
features, safety and emissions recall
campaigns, maintenance reminders (U.S.
models only), and diagnostic information.
When you receive a new message, an icon
appears on the audio/information screen.
Continued
If an icon includes an exclamation point, it indicates
that Acura gives high priority to this message
compared to the one without.
•
: An unread message with high priority
•
: An unread message
1Message category
Message categories can be added, edited, or deleted
through broadcast messages from Acura.
Features
■ Message category
There are six message categories.
• Feature Guide: Appears for the first 90 days of ownership, introducing vehicle
features each day.
• Quick Tips: Supplements your Owner’s Manual with updated vehicle
information.
• Diagnostic Info: Appears when a warning indicator or message comes on.
Rotate
to select Check Later or Check Now.
u Selecting Check Now lets you know if you should see a dealer immediately or
later in accordance with the warning severity level.
• Scheduled Dealer Appointment (U.S. models only): An appointment made
through the Acura server or Acura Owners website can be rescheduled or
canceled from this option. 2 P. 339
• Maintenance Minder (U.S. models only): Lets you know which maintenance
item is due along with a reminder message.
• Recalls/Campaigns: Reminds you of a recall or important safety information.
You should also be notified by mail.
Messages may not appear immediately after your
vehicle purchase. It can take several days for your
dealer to register your vehicle’s ID.
You can call your dealer, find the nearest dealer, or
schedule appointments (U.S. models only) from the
message options in Maintenance Minder (U.S.
models only), Recalls/Campaigns, and Diagnostic
Info.
2 Message Options P. 338
337
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
338 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAcuraLink®u
■ Reading a message
1Reading a message
Features
1. Press the INFO button, rotate
to select
AcuraLink/Messages, then press .
u If your display has changed from Info
menu to Current Drive, press the
MENU button.
u AcuraLink messages appears.
2. Rotate
to select a category, then press
.
u If there are unread messages in a
category, a message icon appears next to
that category.
3. Rotate
to select a message you want to
read, then press .
■ Message Options
Engine System. P062F
Dec. 31, 2011
The engine may not be operating properly.
Select VOICE FOR DETAILS.
If there is no message listed on the menu,
AcuraLink/Messages is grayed out and cannot be
selected.
The message icon disappears once you read the
message.
However, the exclamation mark that indicates that
the message has a high priority remains.
• : A read message with high priority.
1Message Options
While a message is displayed, you can use
options to take immediate action to the
message.
The available options vary by message category.
You can delete all messages in a category at once.
2 Customized Features P. 265
Voice is available only when the Message Auto
Reading setting is in ON, and the language selected
is English.
2 Customized Features P. 265
Available options are:
• Voice: Reads the message aloud. Select Stop to cancel it.
• Find Acura Dlr.: Searches for the nearest Acura dealer.
• Delete: Deletes the displayed message. Rotate
to select this option, then
press .
• Call Your Dealer: Calls your Acura dealer using HFL.
338
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
339 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuAcuraLink®u
• Schedule Dealer Appointment (U.S. models only): Automatically sets an
appointment date at your dealer.
• Phone number: Dials a number displayed in the message via HFL.
• Diagnostic Info: Updates the current diagnostic message by connecting to the
Acura server using HFL.
U.S. models only
■ Dealer Appointments
1Dealer Appointments
To set up an automated dealer appointment when a
regular maintenance is due, visit the Acura Owners
website at www.owners.acura.com (in U.S.) or
www.acura.ca (in Canada), and set the required
option. A reminder message will be sent as the date
for the dealer appointment approaches. A reminder
message will also be sent if you schedule an
appointment online using Acura Owners’ Schedule
Service Appointment function.
Features
You can confirm the scheduled appointment date when you receive a
Maintenance Minder or Recalls/Campaigns message, or reschedule any existing
appointments.
1. Select a Maintenance Minder, Recalls/
Campaigns, or Scheduled Dealer
Appointment message.
2. Rotate
to select Scheduled Dealer
Appointment or Reschedule
Appointment (depending on the screen).
Press .
u A suggested time and date are displayed.
3. Rotate
to select Confirm
Appointment. Press
to accept the time
and date.
4. Press
to select OK.
If you are not satisfied with the proposed
appointment date and time, call your dealer directly.
To cancel the scheduled appointment, select Cancel
Appointment when a message is displayed.
339
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
340
340 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
341 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.
Before Driving
Driving Preparation .......................... 342
Maximum Load Limit........................ 345
Towing a Trailer
Towing Your Vehicle ........................ 347
When Driving
Starting the Engine .......................... 348
Precautions While Driving................. 353
Automatic Transmission ................... 354
Shifting ............................................ 355
SPORT Mode.................................... 359
Cruise Control * ................................ 360
Front Sensor Camera * ...................... 363
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow (LSF) * ........................ 365
* Not available on all models
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .... 378
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ....... 381
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *...385
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * ....389
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System ............... 396
Agile Handling Assist System............ 398
Precision All-Wheel SteerTM (P-AWS®)
System ........................................... 398
Blind Spot Information (BSI) System * .... 399
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)... 401
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation ............. 403
Braking
Brake System ....................................... 405
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ............... 410
Brake Assist System ..............................411
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)* .....412
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped .....................................420
Parking Sensor System * ........................421
Cross Traffic Monitor * ..........................425
Multi-View Rear Camera * .....................429
Surround View Camera System * ..........430
Refueling
Fuel Information ...................................440
How to Refuel ......................................441
Fuel Economy.........................................442
Improving Fuel Economy.......................442
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories...........................................443
Modifications .......................................443
341
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
342 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.
■ Exterior Checks
• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
• Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
• Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.
Driving
342
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 475
• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
u There are blind spots from the inside.
1Exterior Checks
NOTICE
When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert the key if the water
freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
fire. If you’ve parked your vehicle for an extended
period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal.
Also check under the hood for leftover flammable
materials after you or someone else has performed
maintenance on your vehicle.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
343 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
■ Interior Checks
1Interior Checks
• Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk have the aiming readjusted
at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 345
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 124
• Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.
Driving
• Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
• Securely close and lock all doors and the trunk.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 156
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 159
• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 153
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 152
Continued
343
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
344 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 33
• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 68
Driving
344
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
345 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg).
See Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb.
1Maximum Load Limit
3 WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.
Label Example
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -
Continued
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 536
Driving
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories and all cargo.
2 Specifications P. 536
345
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
346 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Driving
Example1
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)
Example2
346
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
347 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your
warranties.
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 531
Driving
347
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
348 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
When Driving
Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
u The electric parking brake indicator
comes on for 15 seconds when you pull
up the electric parking brake switch.
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
Electric Parking
Brake Switch
2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N , it is safer to start it in (P .
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.
Driving
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently
below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant
mixture should be changed to a higher concentration
to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.
Brake Pedal
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft.
If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s
fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 131
348
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
349 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1Starting the Engine
Bring the keyless access remote close to the ENGINE
START/STOP button if the battery in the keyless
access remote is weak.
2 If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is
Weak P. 514
The engine may not start if the keyless access remote
is subjected to strong radio waves.
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to
start the engine.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds
before trying again.
■ Stopping the Engine
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
Driving
1. Shift to (P .
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Continued
349
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
350 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
■ Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback *
You can remotely start the engine using the two-way keyless access remote from
extended distances.
■ To start the engine
With the doors locked, Press the
button,
then press and hold the
button.
Go within the range,
and try again.
Amber LED: Blinks when any button is pressed.
Continues to blink
during a vehicle
self check until the
engine starts.
Driving
Green LED: Comes on while
the engine is running.
Red LED: Blinks when the
remote is out of the keyless
access system range.
The engine runs for up to 10 minutes without you starting the vehicle.
To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the
button, then press and hold the
button.
u The amber LED blinks, then the green LED comes back on if a 10-minute
extension request was transmitted successfully.
After pressing the (lock) button, wait for the green LED to blink. This indicates that
the all the doors and the trunk are locked.
350
* Not available on all models
1Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback *
3 WARNING
Engine exhaust contains toxic carbon
monoxide.
Breathing carbon monoxide can kill you
or cause unconsciousness.
Never use the remote engine starter
when the vehicle is parked in a garage
or other area with limited ventilation.
If there are buildings and obstacles between your
vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced.
This distance may vary by external electrical
interference.
The engine may not start by the remote engine start
if:
• You have disabled a remote engine start setting
using the multi-information display.
• The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
• The shift lever is in a position other than (P .
• The hood is open, or any door or the trunk is
unlocked.
• You have already used the remote twice to start
the engine.
• Another registered keyless access remote is in the
vehicle.
• There is any antenna failure.
• Door is unlocked with the built-in key.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
351 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
■ To stop the engine
Press and hold the
for one second.
Amber LED: Blinks when any
button is pressed.
1Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback *
button
Red LED:
● Comes on for one second to let you
know that the engine has stopped.
●
Before starting the engine, make sure to check the
door lock status using the remote. When you press
the
button, wait for the green LED to blink. If
the red LED turns on, the doors and trunk did not
lock, and the engine does not start.
While the engine is running, the vehicle will
automatically precondition inside the vehicle.
When it is warm outside:
• The air conditioning is activated in recirculation
mode.
When it is cold outside:
• The defroster is activated at a moderately warm
temperature.
• The rear defogger and door mirror heaters are
activated.
Blinks when the remote is out of
the keyless access system range.
The engine will not stop.
Continued
Driving
* Not available on all models
• The engine oil pressure is low.
• The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
• The telematics unit malfunctions.
• The security system alarm is not set.
Go within the range,
and try again.
351
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
352 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
■ Starting to Drive
When the engine was started using the two-way keyless access remote *
1. While depressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
When the engine was started in any case
2. Put the shift lever to (D . Select (R when reversing.
3. With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal.
u Make sure the electric parking brake indicator goes off.
4. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.
■ Hill Start Assist System
Driving
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Move the shift lever to (D when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then
release the brake pedal.
352
* Not available on all models
1Starting to Drive
You can also release the parking brake by pressing
the electric parking brake switch while depressing the
brake pedal.
When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle
more smoothly by manually releasing it with the
electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with
the accelerator pedal.
When the engine was started using the two-way
keyless access remote *
The engine stops when the shift lever is moved out of
(P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pressed. Follow the step 1 when starting to drive.
1Hill Start Assist System
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
353 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
Precautions While Driving
■ In Rain
1Precautions While Driving
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine,
driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
NOTICE
Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission.
NOTICE
The following can damage the under spoiler:
• Parking the vehicle by a parking block
• Parallel parking along the road shoulder
• Driving toward the bottom of a hill
• Driving up or down to a different surface level
(such as a road shoulder)
• Driving on a rutted or bumpy road
• Driving on a road with potholes.
NOTICE
Driving
If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on
the full left or right position for a while, the electric
power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system
goes into a protective mode, and limits its
performance. The steering wheel becomes harder
and harder to operate. Once the system cools down,
the EPS system is restored.
Repeated operation under these conditions can
eventually damage the system.
If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while
driving, the engine will shut down and all steering
and brake power assist functions will stop, making it
difficult to control the vehicle.
Continued
353
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
354 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission
■ Other Precautions
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
Automatic Transmission
■ Creeping
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
■ Kickdown
Driving
354
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress
the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
1Precautions While Driving
Do not put the shift lever in (N , as you will lose
engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as to not damage the engine or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
355 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
1Shifting
You cannot change the power mode from ON to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in (P .
■ Shift lever positions
Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Release Button
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures (22°F/-30°C), there may be a short delay before the
shift is indicated in the display. Always confirm you
are in the correct gear before driving.
Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Used when idling
Continued
Driving
Drive
Used for:
● Normal driving (gears change between 1st
and 6th automatically)
● Temporarily driving in the sequential shift
mode
● Driving in the sequential shift mode (when
driving in SPORT mode)
355
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
356 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
■ Shift Lever Operation
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
M (Sequential Shift mode)
Indicator/Gear Position
Indicator
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Tachometer’s red zone
Driving
Press the shift lever
release button and
shift.
Depress the brake pedal
and press the shift lever
release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the
shift lever release button.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in
any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
When the engine speed is increased while the shift
lever is in (N , (P or (R , the fuel supply may be cut
off even without the engine speed entering the
tachometer’s red zone.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
356
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
357 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
■ Sequential Shift Mode
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 6th gears without removing your
hands from the steering wheel. The transmission will switch to the sequential shift
mode.
■ When the shift lever is in (D :
The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode momentarily, and the gear position
indicator will come on.
Once you start traveling at a constant speed, the sequential shift mode will
automatically switch off, and the gear position indicator will go off.
Hold the (+ paddle shifter for two seconds to return to normal drive.
■ When the shift lever is in (D with SPORT mode:
Continued
Driving
The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode, and the M (sequential shift)
indicator and gear position indicator will come on. At speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or
less, the vehicle automatically shifts down into 1st gear. If you do not operate the
paddle shifters while in 1st gear, the transmission automatically shifts up to 2nd
gear.
If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s
red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up to 6th.
You can cancel this mode by pressing the SPORT button, or pulling the (+ paddle
shifter for a few seconds. When the sequential shift mode is canceled, the sequential
shift mode indicator and shift indicator go off.
357
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
358 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
■ Second gear lock mode
If you pull the (+ paddle shifter while stopped or driving at 6 mph (10 km/h) or less,
the gear position will be locked in 2nd gear. This makes it easier to pull away on
slippery surfaces such as snow covered roads.
To cancel the 2nd gear lock mode, pull the (- paddle shifter.
1Sequential Shift Mode Operation
■ Sequential Shift Mode Operation
Paddle Shifter
(Shift down)
Each paddle shift operation makes a single gear
change.
To change gears continuously, release the paddle
shifter before pulling it again for the next gear.
Paddle Shifter
(Shift up)
Driving
Shift Up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
Downshifting when pulling
the
paddle shifter.
(Changes to a lower gear)
358
Recommended Shift Points
Use this table as a guideline for efficient fuel
economy and effective emission control.
Upshifting when pulling
the
paddle shifter.
(Changes to a higher gear)
Normal Acceleration
17 mph (28 km/h)
27 mph (44 km/h)
36 mph (57 km/h)
41 mph (66 km/h)
44 mph (71 km/h)
If the gear position indicator blinks when you try to
shift up or down, this means your vehicle speed is not
in its allowable gear range.
Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift
down while the indicator is blinking.
In sport mode, to prioritize the engine performance
enhancement, the transmission may not allow for
shifting up while the engine speed is low.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
359 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguSPORT Mode
SPORT Mode
SPORT Mode
Indicator
SPORT Button
The SPORT mode increases engine performance and handling.
This mode is suitable for driving on hills or through curves on mountain roads.
Driving
To turn the SPORT mode on and off, press the SPORT button.
The SPORT mode is turned off every time you start the engine, even if you turned it
on the last time you drove the vehicle.
359
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
360 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control *
Cruise Control *
Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the
accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a
constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.
■ Vehicle speed for cruise control:
■ Shift positions for cruise control:
In (D
How to use
Driving
360
■ Press the CRUISE button on
the steering wheel.
* Not available on all models
3 WARNING
Improper use of the cruise control can lead
to a crash.
When to use
Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
1Cruise Control *
Always keep sufficient distance
between you and the vehicle in
front of you.
Use the cruise control only when traveling
on open highways in good weather.
It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed
when driving uphill or downhill.
CRUISE MAIN is on in the
instrument panel.
Cruise control is ready to use.
When not using cruise control:
Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE
button.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
361 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control *
■ To Set the Vehicle Speed
On when cruise control begins
RES/+/SET/− Switch
Driving
Press down and release
Take your foot off the pedal and press the RES/+/SET/– switch down when you
reach the desired speed.
The moment you release the RES/+/SET/– switch, the set speed is fixed, and cruise
control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
Continued
361
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
362 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control *
■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+/SET/– switch on the steering
wheel.
You can set the vehicle speed pressing the RES/+/
SET/– switch down on the steering wheel when
adjusting the speed with the accelerator and brake
pedals.
To increase speed
To decrease speed
Driving
• Each time you press the switch up or down, the vehicle speed is increased or
decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• If you keep the switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.
■ To Cancel
CRUISE Button
CANCEL Button
362
1To Cancel
To cancel cruise control, do any of the
following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the CRUISE button.
• Depress the brake pedal.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+/
SET/– switch up while driving at a speed of at least
25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
• When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
• When the CRUISE button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
363 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera *
Front Sensor Camera *
The camera, used in systems such as LKAS, RDM, ACC with LSF, and CMBSTM, is
designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate its
functions.
■ Camera Location and Handling Tips
Front Sensor
Camera
This camera is located behind the rearview
mirror.
* Not available on all models
Continued
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield, the hood, or the front grill that could
obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the
system to operate abnormally.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Acura replacement windshield. Making even
minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision or
installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument
panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent
the system from detecting lane lines properly.
Driving
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing
system to shut off, when parking, find a shady
area or face the front of the vehicle away from
the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do
not allow it to cover the camera housing.
Covering the camera can concentrate heat on
it.
1Front Sensor Camera *
363
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
364 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera *
1Front Sensor Camera *
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message
appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode
with the airflow directed towards the camera.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the camera.
Driving
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Clean Front Windshield message
appears:
• Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after
you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a
while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
364
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
365 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle slows to a stop, decelerates and
stops your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the
accelerator.
When ACC with LSF slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your vehicle's brake
lights will illuminate.
When to use
The camera is
located behind
the rearview
mirror.
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *
3 WARNING
Improper use of ACC with LSF can lead to a
crash.
Use ACC with LSF only when driving on
expressways or freeways and in good
weather conditions.
3 WARNING
ACC with LSF has limited braking
capability and may not stop your vehicle
in time to avoid a collision with a vehicle
that quickly stops in front of you.
The radar sensor is
in the front grille.
■ Vehicle speed for ACC with LSF: A vehicle is detected ahead within ACC with
Driving
Always be prepared to apply the brake
pedal if the conditions require.
Important Reminder
As with any system, there are limits to ACC with LSF.
Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always
keep a safe distance between your vehicle and other
vehicles.
LSF range – ACC with LSF operates at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h).
No vehicle is detected within ACC with LSF range – ACC with LSF operates at
the speed of 25 mph (40km/h) or above.
■ Shift position for ACC with LSF: In (D .
* Not available on all models
Continued
365
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
366 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *
How to use
■ Press the MAIN button on
the steering wheel.
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *
ACC (green) is on in the
instrument panel.
ACC with LSF is ready to
use.
When the MAIN button is pressed, ACC with LSF and
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are both turned
on or off.
ACC with LSF may not work properly under certain
conditions.
2 ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations
P. 370
When not using ACC with LSF: Turn off adaptive
cruise by pressing the MAIN button. This also will
turn off the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).
Driving
Do not use ACC with LSF under the following
conditions:
• On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in
continuous stop and go traffic.
• On roads with sharp turns.
• On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set
vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such
cases, ACC with LSF will not apply the brakes to
maintain the set speed.
• On roads with toll collection facilities or other
objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking
areas, or facilities with drive through access.
366
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
367 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *
■ To Set the Vehicle Speed
1To Set the Vehicle Speed
RES/+/SET/− Switch
On when ACC with LSF
begins
You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the multi-information display
between mph and km/h.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
Press down and release
Driving
When driving at about 25 mph (40 km/h) or above: Take your foot off the pedal
and press down the RES/+/SET/– switch when you reach the desired speed. The
moment you release the switch, the set speed is fixed, and ACC with LSF begins.
When driving at slower than about 25 mph (40 km/h): If the vehicle is moving
and the brake pedal is not depressed, pressing the switch fixes the set speed to
about 25 mph (40 km/h) regardless of current vehicle speed. If the vehicle is
stationary, you can set the vehicle speed even with the brake pedal depressed.
When ACC with LSF starts operating, the
Set Vehicle Distance
vehicle icon, distance bars and set speed
appear on the multi-information display.
Set Vehicle Speed
Continued
367
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
368 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *
■ When in Operation
1When in Operation
■ There is a vehicle ahead
ACC with LSF monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC with LSF range. If a
vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC with LSF system maintains or decelerates your
vehicle’s set speed in order to keep the vehicle’s set following-distance from the
vehicle ahead.
2 To Set or Change Following-Distance P. 373
Beep
Driving
ACC with LSF Range: 394 ft. (120 m)
When a vehicle whose speed is slower than
your set speed comes in or cuts in front of you
and is detected by the radar, your vehicle
starts to slow down.
A vehicle icon appears on the
multi-information display
368
If the vehicle detected ahead of you slows down
abruptly, or if another vehicle is detected cutting in
front of you, the beeper sounds and a message
appears on the multi-information display.
Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate
distance from the vehicle ahead.
Even if the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC with LSF may
start accelerating your vehicle under the following
circumstances:
• The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
• A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster
than your vehicle, gradually increasing the distance
between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle
detected in front of you comes in and goes out of the
ACC with LSF detecting range. Change the ACC
Forward Vehicle Detect Beep setting.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
369 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *
■ There is no vehicle ahead
A vehicle icon with dotted-line
contour appears on the multiinformation display
1When in Operation
Your vehicle maintains the set speed without
having to keep your foot on the brake or
accelerator pedal.
If there previously was a vehicle detected
ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at
the set speed, ACC with LSF accelerates your
vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.
■ When you depress the accelerator pedal
■ A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with LSF range and slows to a stops
Your vehicle also stops, automatically. The
Stopped message appears on the multiinformation display.
When the vehicle ahead of you starts again,
the vehicle icon on the multi-information
display blinks. If you press the RES/+/SET/–
switch up or down, or depress the accelerator
pedal, ACC with LSF operates again within the
prior set speed.
Continued
Exiting a vehicle that has been stopped
while the ACC with LSF system is operating
can result in the vehicle moving without
operator control.
A vehicle that moves without operator
control can cause a crash, resulting in
serious injury or death.
Never exit a vehicle when the vehicle is
stopped by ACC with LSF.
Limitations
You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe
distance when using ACC with LSF. Additionally,
ACC with LSF may not work properly under certain
conditions.
2 ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations
P. 370
Driving
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or
visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC with LSF range.
ACC with LSF stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal,
the system resumes the set speed.
There are times when the vehicle speed will decrease when the accelerator pedal is
lightly applied.
3 WARNING
When your vehicle stops automatically because a
vehicle detected ahead of you has stopped, the
distance between the two vehicles will vary based on
the ACC with LSF following-distance setting, as
follows:
Short: 9.8 ft (3.0 m)
Middle: 12.1 ft (3.7 m)
Long: 14.4 ft (4.4 m)
Extra Long: 16.4 ft (5.0 m)
2 To Set or Change Following-Distance
P. 373
369
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
370 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *
■ ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off and the ACC indicator will come on under
certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other
conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions.
1ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations
The radar sensor for ACC with LSF is shared with the
collision mitigation braking systemTM (CMBSTM).
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) * P. 412
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 363
■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
■ Vehicle conditions
Driving
• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (Wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire *, etc.).
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• The parking brake is applied.
• When the front grille is dirty.
• When the front of the vehicle tilts up due to heavy cargo in the trunk or rear seats.
• When tire chains are installed.
370
* Not available on all models
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 363
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
371 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *
Continued
Driving
■ Detection limitations
• A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
• When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed.
• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small
vehicle.
• When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
• When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult
for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large.
• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
• When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
• When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly.
• When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.
• When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.
371
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
372 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *
■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+/SET/– switch on the steering
wheel.
To increase speed
To decrease speed
Driving
372
• Each time you press the switch up or down, the vehicle speed is increased or
decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
• If you keep the switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower
than your increased set speed, ACC with LSF may not
accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set
following-distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
373 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *
■ To Set or Change Following-Distance
Press the (distance) button to change the
ACC with LSF following-distance.
Each time you press the button, the followingdistance (the interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of you) setting cycles through
short, middle, long, and extra long followingdistances.
Distance Button
Determine the most appropriate followingdistance setting based on your specific driving
conditions. Be sure to adhere to any
following-distance requirements set by local
regulation.
Driving
Continued
373
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
374 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *
The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or
extra long following-distance becomes. See the following examples for your
reference.
When the Set Speed is:
Following-distance
Driving
374
50 mph (80 km/h)
65 mph (104 km/h)
Short
83 feet
25 meters
1.1 sec
100 feet
31 meters
1.1 sec
Middle
110 feet
33 meters
1.5 sec
137 feet
42 meters
1.5 sec
Long
154 feet
47 meters
2.1 sec
200 feet
61 meters
2.1 sec
Extra
Long
204 feet
62 meters
2.8 sec
265 feet
81 meters
2.8 sec
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
375 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *
■ To Cancel
MAIN
Button
CANCEL
Button
1To Cancel
To cancel ACC with LSF, do any of the
following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the MAIN button.
u ACC with LSF indicator goes off.
• Depress the brake pedal.
u When the LSF function has stopped the
vehicle, you cannot cancel ACC with LSF
by depressing the brake pedal.
Resuming the prior set speed: After you have
canceled ACC with LSF, you can resume the prior set
speed while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+/SET/
– switch up.
The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC
with LSF has been turned off using the MAIN button.
Press the MAIN button to activate the system, then
set the desired speed.
Driving
Continued
375
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
376 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *
■ Automatic cancellation
Driving
376
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the multi-information display when
ACC with LSF is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC
with LSF to automatically cancel:
• Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
• When the radar sensor in the front grille gets dirty.
• The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
• Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
• Abrupt steering wheel movement.
• When the ABS, VSA® or CMBSTM is activated.
• When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on.
• When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.
• When you manually apply the parking brake.
• When the detected vehicle within the ACC with LSF range is too close to your
vehicle.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
The ACC with LSF automatic cancellation can be also triggered by the following
causes. In these cases, the parking brake will be automatically applied.
• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is stationary.
• The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes.
• The engine is turned off.
1Automatic cancellation
Even though ACC with LSF has been automatically
canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed.
Wait until the condition that caused ACC with LSF to
cancel improves, then press the RES/+/SET/– switch
down.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
377 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *
■ To Switch ACC with LSF to Cruise Control
Press and hold the
1To Switch ACC with LSF to Cruise Control
(distance) button for one second.
Cruise Mode Selected appears on the multi-information display for two seconds,
and then the mode switches to Cruise.
To switch back to ACC with LSF, press and hold the
ACC with
LSF ON
Always be aware which mode you are in. When you
are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist
you to maintain a following-distance from a vehicle
ahead of you.
button again for one second.
Cruise
Control ON
Driving
Distance Button
377
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
378 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)
Models without Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
1Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Alerts you when it detects the possibility of your vehicle colliding with the vehicle in
front of yours.
If the system determines a collision is possible, it gives both visual and audible alerts.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes,
etc.).
■ How the system works
The system may give warnings of potential collisions when your vehicle speed is
above 10 mph (15 km/h).
You can set Long, Normal or Short for when warnings start:
LONG
NORMAL
Driving
SHORT
Your Vehicle
378
Vehicle Ahead
Important Safety Reminder
FCW cannot detect all objects ahead and may not
detect a given object; accuracy of the system will vary
based on weather, speed and other factors. FCW
does not include a braking function. It is always your
responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid
collisions.
You can change the Forward Collision Warning
Distance setting or turn the system on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
The camera is shared with Lane Departure Warning
(LDW).
2 Lane Departure Warning Camera (LDW
Camera) P. 382
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield that could obstruct the FCW camera’s
field of vision.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the FCW camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Acura replacement windshield. Making even
minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision or
installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate
the camera. Proper calibration of the FCW camera is
necessary for the system to operate properly.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
379 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)
The camera is located
behind the rearview mirror.
1Automatic shutoff
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera system to shut off,
when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the
vehicle away from the sun.
If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to
cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can
concentrate heat on the camera.
Beep
The beeper sounds and the BRAKE
message appears in the multiinformation display until a possible
collision is avoided.
Continued
If the Can Not Operate: Camera Too Hot message
appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when
windows are fogged.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the FCW camera.
Driving
■ Automatic shutoff
FCW may automatically shut itself off and the FCW indicator comes and stays on
when:
• The temperature inside the system is high.
• The windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
Once the conditions that caused FCW to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g.,
cleaning), the system comes back on.
379
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
380 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)
■ FCW Limitations
FCW may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle, and may
activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or when there is no
vehicle ahead, under the following conditions.
Condition
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Driving
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
380
The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
When either your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you accelerates rapidly.
The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, a small vehicle, or a unique vehicle such as a tractor.
When you drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an extended period that makes it difficult for the sensor/camera to
properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
When there are pedestrians or animals in front of your vehicle.
When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).
A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.
An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
When the temperature inside the system is high.
A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).
When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.
When streetlights are perceived as the taillight of a vehicle in front of yours.
When driving at night, the vehicle ahead of you is running with either taillight bulb burned out.
When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
381 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)
Models without Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
1Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
Alerts you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally
crossing over detected lane markings.
■ How the System Works
If your vehicle is getting too close to detected
left or right side lane markings without a turn
signal activated, LDW will give audible and
visual alerts.
The beeper sounds and the Lane Departure
message appears on the multi-information
display, letting you know that you need to
take appropriate action.
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LDW has limitations.
Over-reliance on LDW may result in a collision. It is
always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within
your driving lane.
LDW only alerts you when lane drift is detected
without a turn signal in use. LDW may not detect all
lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary
based on weather, speed and lane marker condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
Driving
■ How the System Activates
1How the System Activates
The system begins to search for lane markings when all the following conditions are
met:
• The vehicle is traveling between 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
Continued
LDW may automatically shut off and the LDW
indicator comes and stays on.
2 Indicators P. 68
381
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
382 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)
■ Lane Departure Warning Camera (LDW Camera)
LDW Camera
Driving
382
The camera is located behind the rearview
mirror.
1Lane Departure Warning Camera (LDW Camera)
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield that could obstruct the LDW camera’s
field of vision.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the LDW camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Acura replacement windshield. Making even
minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision or
installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the LDW
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
383 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)
■ LDW On and Off
Indicator
1Lane Departure Warning Camera (LDW Camera)
Press the LDW button to turn the system on
and off.
u The indicator in the button comes on
when the system is on.
LDW Button
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument
panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent
the system from detecting lane lines properly.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera system to shut
off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front
of the vehicle away from the sun.
If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to
cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can
concentrate heat on the camera.
Driving
If the Can Not Operate: Camera Too Hot message
appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when
windows are fogged.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the LDW camera.
Continued
383
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
384 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)
■ LDW Limitations
LDW may not activate or may not recognize lanes, and may activate even when
keeping in the middle of a lane, under the following conditions.
Condition
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Driving
●
●
●
●
●
384
When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).
A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.
An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
When the temperature inside the system is high.
A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).
When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.
When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
When you drive on a wet road surface following another vehicle.
u The camera may perceive the tire tracks in the water as lane lines.
When there is snow or wheel tracks on the side of the road.
When the road has many repaired area or an erased lane line.
When the vehicle is running over painted signs or crosswalk markings.
When you drive in a lane with worn-out lane markings.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
385 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *
Alerts and helps to assist you when the system determines a possibility of your
vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings.
■ How the System Works
The front camera behind the rearview mirror
monitors left and right lane markings (in white
or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close
to detected lane markings without a turn
signal activated, the system, in addition to a
visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts
you with rapid vibrations on the steering
wheel, to help you remain within the detected
lane.
If the system determines that its steering input
is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the
roadway, it may apply braking.
u Braking is applied only when the lane
markings are solid continuous lines.
The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid
crossing over detected lane markings.
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has
limitations.
Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a
collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the
vehicle within your driving lane.
The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is
detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM
system may not detect all lane markings or lane or
roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on
weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is
always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 363
Driving
As a visual alert, the Lane Departure
message appears on the multi-information
display.
1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *
The RDM system may not work properly or may work
improperly under the certain conditions:
2 RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 387
There are times when you may not notice RDM
functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or
road surface conditions. If the Lane Departure
message appears repeatedly and you do not apply
responsive actions, the beeper sounds and RDM
functions will be canceled.
If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system
beeps to alert you.
* Not available on all models
Continued
385
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
386 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *
■ How the System Activates
The system becomes ready to start searching for lane markings when all the
following conditions are met:
• The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
• The wipers are not in continuous operation.
• The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,
braking or steering.
■ RDM On and Off
Driving
386
The RDM system may automatically shut off and the
indicator comes and stays on.
2 Indicators P. 68
RDM system function can be impacted when the
vehicle is:
• Not driven within a traffic lane.
• Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of
a lane.
• Driven in a narrow lane.
1RDM On and Off
Press the RDM button to turn the system on
and off.
u The indicator in the button comes on and
the message appears on the multiinformation display when the system is
on.
Indicator
RDM Button
1How the System Activates
When you have selected Warning Only from the
customized options using the multi-information
display, the system does not operate the steering
wheel and braking.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
387 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *
■ RDM Conditions and Limitations
The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle
under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.
■ Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
Continued
Driving
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
387
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
388 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk).
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines).
• Driving on roads with double lines.
Driving
■ Vehicle conditions
388
* Not available on all models
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire *, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• When tire chains are installed.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
389 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *
Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and
provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.
■ Tactile and visual alerts
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel and a warning display alert you that the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.
■ LKAS camera
Monitors the lane
lines
■ Steering input assist
The system applies torque to the
steering to keep the vehicle between
the left and right lane lines. The applied
torque becomes stronger as the vehicle
gets closer to either of the lane lines.
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *
Important Safety Reminders
The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not a
substitute for your vehicle control. The system does
not work if you take your hands off the steering
wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.
2 Multi-Information Display Warning and
Information Messages P. 95
Do not place objects on the instrument panel.
Objects may reflect on the front windshield and
prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes.
Driving
The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected
without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect
all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will
vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker
condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways.
When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and
resumes after the signals are off.
() If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS
alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering.
* Not available on all models
Continued
The LKAS may not work properly or may work
improperly under the certain conditions:
2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 394
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 363
389
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
390 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *
■ Lane Keep Support Function
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle
nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become
stronger.
The LKAS may not function as designed on while
driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads
with sharp curves.
When it fails to detect lanes, the system will
temporarily be canceled. When lane is detected,
system will recover automatically.
Driving
■ Lane Departure Warning Function
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering
wheel vibration as well as a warning display.
Warning Area
Warning Area
390
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
391 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *
■ When the System can be Used
1When the System can be Used
The system can be used when the following conditions are met.
• The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and
your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
• The vehicle speed is between 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
• The wipers are not in continuous operation.
If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line
due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS
and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
■ How to activate the system
MAIN Button
Driving
LKAS Button
1. Press the MAIN button.
u The LKAS is on in the multi-information
display.
The system is ready to use.
2. Press the LKAS button.
u Lane outlines appear on the multiinformation display.
The system is activated.
Continued
391
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
392 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *
3. Keep your vehicle near the center of the
lane while driving.
u The dotted outer lines change to solid
ones once the system starts operating
after detecting the left and right lane
markings.
■ To cancel
The LKAS temporarily deactivates when it fails to
detect lane lines. When the system detects the lines
again, it comes back on automatically.
1To cancel
To cancel the LKAS:
Press the MAIN or LKAS button.
Driving
MAIN Button
LKAS Button
392
1When the System can be Used
The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the
engine, even if you turned it on the last time
you drove the vehicle.
Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC with LSF
on and off.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
393 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *
■ The system operation is suspended if
When the LKAS is suspended,
the lane lines on the multiinformation display change to
contour lines, and the beeper
sounds.
you:
• Set the wipers to continuous operation.
u Turning the wipers off resumes the
LKAS.
• Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40
mph (64 km/h) or less.
u Increasing the vehicle speed to about 45
mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the
LKAS.
• Depress the brake pedal.
u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting
the lane lines again once you release the
brake pedal.
Driving
■ The LKAS may automatically be suspended when:
• The system fails to detect lane lines.
• The steering wheel is quickly turned.
• You fail to steer the vehicle.
• The vehicle runs on a curved road over the speed limit.
Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.
■ The LKAS may automatically be canceled when:
• The camera temperature gets extremely high or low.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
• Driving through a sharp curve.
• Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h).
• The ABS or VSA system engages.
The beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled.
Continued
393
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
394 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *
■ LKAS Conditions and Limitations
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in
the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following:
■ Environmental conditions
Driving
394
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
395 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk).
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines).
• Driving on roads with double lines.
* Not available on all models
Driving
■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire *, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
395
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
396 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System
Helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than
what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does
so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
■ VSA® Operation
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink.
Driving
396
VSA® System
Indicator
1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size
are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type
of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays
on while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
397 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
■ VSA® OFF Button
VSA® OFF Indicator
This button is on the driver side control panel.
To partially turn the VSA features on and off,
press and hold it until you hear a beep.
The traction control stops fully functioning,
allowing the wheels to spin more freely at low
speed. The VSA® OFF indicator will also come
on.
To turn it on again, press the
button until you hear a beep.
(VSA® OFF)
With the
button pressed, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability, but VSA®
traction and stability enhancement becomes less
effective.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the
button pressed.
When the
button is pressed, the traction control
function becomes less effective. This allows for the
wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should
only attempt to free your vehicle with the
button
pressed if you are not able to free it without.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
press the
button again. We do not recommend
driving your vehicle with the
button pressed
(indicator on).
Driving
VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you press the button the last
time you drove the vehicle.
1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
397
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
398 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist System
Agile Handling Assist System
Lightly brakes each of the front and rear wheels, as needed, when you turn the
steering wheel, and helps support the vehicle’s stability and performance during
cornering.
1Agile Handling Assist System
The agile handling assist system cannot enhance
stability in all driving situations. You still need to drive
and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions
and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays
on while driving, the agile handling assist system
does not activate.
You may hear a sound coming from the engine
compartment while the system is activated. This is
normal.
Precision All-Wheel SteerTM (P-AWS®) System
Driving
Monitors road conditions while you are driving. In response to current driving
conditions, the system automatically makes slight adjustment to the relative rear
wheel toe settings to help enhance vehicle control and stability.
1Precision All-Wheel SteerTM (P-AWS®) System
The Precision All-Wheel SteerTM (P-AWS®) System
cannot enhance vehicle control and stability in all
driving situations. You still need to drive and corner
at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
The toe setting of the rear wheels may get stuck in a
non-centered setting if the system malfunctions
while driving. This can cause the vehicle to pull to a
side even as you keep the steering wheel in the
center position. If this occurs, the system
automatically limits the vehicle speed to a maximum
of 50 mph (80 km/h). Reduce your speed and be
extra cautious, as handling may be difficult. Go to a
dealer immediately.
398
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
399 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information (BSI) System *
Blind Spot Information (BSI) System *
Is designed to detect vehicles in specified alert zones adjacent to your vehicle,
particularly in harder to see areas commonly known as “blind spots.”
When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the
appropriate indicator comes on for a few seconds, providing assistance when you
change lanes.
■ How the system works
3 WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
change lanes before doing so may result in
a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on the blind spot
information system when changing lanes.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side
of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.
Alert Zone
A
B
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, BSI has limitations. Over
reliance on BSI may result in a collision.
The system is for your convenience only. Even if an
object is within the alert zone, the following
situations may occur.
• The BSI alert indicator may not come on due to
obstruction (splashes, etc.) even without the Blind
Spot Info Not Available multi-information
display appearing.
• The BSI alert indicator may come on even with the
message appearing.
C
Driving
Radar sensors detect a
vehicle in the alert zone
when your vehicle is moving
forward at 20 mph (32 km/h) Radar Sensors:
or faster.
underneath the
rear bumper
Alert zone range
corners
A: Approx. 1.6 ft. (0.5 m)
B: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)
C: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)
1Blind Spot Information (BSI) System *
The BSI alert indicator may not come on under the
following conditions:
• A vehicle does not stay in the alert zone for more
than two seconds.
• A vehicle is parked in a side lane.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and the
vehicle you are passing is greater than 6 mph (10 km/h).
* Not available on all models
Continued
399
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
400 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information (BSI) System *
■ When the system detects a vehicle
BSI Alert Indicator: Located near the outside
rearview mirror on both sides.
Comes on when:
● A vehicle enters the alert zone from behind
to overtake you with a speed difference of
no more than 31 mph (50 km/h) from your
vehicle.
● You pass a vehicle with a speed difference
of no more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Blinks and a beeper sounds when:
You move the turn signal lever in the direction
of the detected vehicle. The beeper sounds
three times.
1Blind Spot Information (BSI) System *
• An object not detected by the radar sensors
Comes On
approaches or passes your vehicle.
• A vehicle running in the adjacent lane is a
motorcycle or other small vehicle.
Blinks
The system does not operate when in (R .
You can change the setting for BSI.
2 Customized Features P. 103, 265
BSI may be adversely affected when:
• Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc,.) are
detected.
• An object that does not reflect radio waves well,
such as a motorcycle, is in the alert zone.
Driving
• Driving on a curved road.
• A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent
lane.
• The system picks up external electrical interference.
• The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly
repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed.
• The orientation of the sensors has been changed.
• In bad weather (Heavy rain, snow, and fog).
For proper BSI operation:
• Always keep the rear bumper corner area clean.
• Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with
labels or stickers of any kind.
• Take your vehicle to a dealer if you need the rear
bumper corner area or the radar sensors to be repaired,
or the rear bumper corner area is strongly impacted.
400
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
401 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Monitors the tire pressure while you are
driving. If your vehicle’s tire pressure becomes
significantly low, the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on and a message appears on
the multi-information display.
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come
on.
2 If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks P. 525
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
• Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
• Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come
on as a result of over inflation.
Driving
Continued
401
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
402 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
■ Tire Pressure Monitor
1Tire Pressure Monitor
To select the tire pressure monitor, set the power
mode to ON, and roll the right selector wheel
until you see the tire pressure screen.
The pressure for each tire is displayed in PSI
(U.S.) or kPa (Canada).
Tire Pressures Low is displayed when a tire
has significantly low pressure. The specific tire
is displayed on the screen.
Driving
402
* Not available on all models
The pressure displayed on the multi-information
display can be slightly different from the actual
pressure as measured by a gauge. If there is a
significant difference between the two values, or if
the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator and the message
on the multi-information display do not go off after
you have inflated the tire to the specified pressure,
have the system checked by a dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitor Problem may appear if you
drive with the compact spare tire *, or there is a
problem with the TPMS.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
403 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale
Driving
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Continued
403
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
404 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
Driving
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
404
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
405 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Braking
Brake System
■ Parking Brake
1Parking Brake
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. You can
manually apply and release, or automatically release it.
■ Manual operations
Use the electric parking brake switch to apply or release the brake. Manually
releasing the parking brake using the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and
smoothly when facing down hill on steep hills.
■ To apply manually
Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently
and securely.
u The electric parking brake indicator
comes on.
You may hear the electric parking brake system
operating when you apply or release the parking
brake, or set the power mode to OFF. This is normal.
The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric
parking brake system operation when you apply or
release the parking brake. This is normal.
You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the
battery goes dead.
2 Jump Starting P. 516
The parking brake is applied while the vehicle is
moving with the electric parking brake switch being
pulled.
Driving
Electric Parking
Brake Switch
■ To release manually
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the electric parking brake switch.
u The electric parking brake indicator goes
off.
Electric Parking
Brake Switch
Continued
405
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
406 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBrakinguBrake System
■ To release automatically
Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake.
Use the accelerator pedal to release the brake when you are starting the vehicle
facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Accelerator Pedal
When on a hill, it may require more
accelerator input to release.
u The electric parking brake indicator goes
off.
Driving
You can release the parking brake automatically when:
• You are wearing the driver’s seat belt.
• The engine is running.
• The shift lever is in any position other than (P or (N .
1Parking Brake
In the following situations, the parking brake
automatically operates.
• When the vehicle stops more than 10 minutes
while ACC with LSF * is activated.
• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is stopped automatically by ACC with
LSF *.
• When the engine is turned off while ACC with LSF *
is activated.
• When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake
hold system activated for more than 10 minutes.
• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is stopped and brake hold is applied.
• When the engine is turned off while brake hold is
applied.
• When there is a problem with the Brake Hold
System.
If the parking brake cannot be released
automatically, release it manually.
The parking brake cannot be released automatically
while the following indicators are on:
• Malfunction indicator lamp
• Transmission indicator
The parking brake may not be released automatically
while the following indicators are on:
• Electric parking brake system indicator
• VSA® system indicator
• ABS indicator
• Supplemental restraint system indicator
406
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
407 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBrakinguBrake System
■ Foot Brake
1Foot Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist
helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases
the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency
situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 411
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 410
Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, the brake pads need to be
replaced. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Driving
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
Your vehicle is equipped with a hydraulic brake
booster that, under certain conditions, such as
braking at high altitudes, supplements the vacuum
power assist. When the hydraulic brake booster
activates, you may hear a motor sound and a slight
vibration in the pedal. This is normal.
Continued
407
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
408 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBrakinguBrake System
■ Automatic Brake Hold
1Automatic Brake Hold
Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is
pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, such as
when you stop at a traffic light.
■ Turning on the system
■ Activating the system
On
On
On
On
Goes
Off
U.S.
Automatic Brake
Hold Button
Driving
408
Fasten your seat belt
properly, then start the
engine. Press the
automatic brake hold
button.
● The automatic brake
hold system indicator
comes on. The system
is turned on.
Brake Pedal
■ Canceling the system
On
Canada
Depress the brake pedal
to come to a complete
stop. The shift lever must
be in (D or (N .
● The automatic brake
hold indicator comes
on. Braking is kept for
up to 10 minutes.
● Release the brake
pedal after the
automatic brake hold
indicator comes on.
Accelerator Pedal
Depress the accelerator
pedal while the shift
lever is in (D or (R . The
system is canceled and
the vehicle starts to
move.
● The automatic brake
hold indicator goes
off. The system
continues to be on.
3 WARNING
Activating the automatic brake hold system
on steep hills or slippery roads may still
allow the vehicle to move if you remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may
cause a crash resulting in serious injury or
death.
Never activate the automatic brake hold
system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from
moving when stopped on a steep hill or
slippery roads.
3 WARNING
Using the automatic brake hold system to
park the vehicle may result in the vehicle
unexpectedly moving.
If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may
cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or
death.
Never leave the vehicle when braking is
temporarily kept by automatic brake hold
and always park the vehicle by putting the
transmission in (P and applying the parking
brake.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
409 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBrakinguBrake System
■ The system automatically cancels when:
• You depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to (P or (R .
• You engage the parking brake.
Under the following conditions, the system automatically cancels, and the parking
brake is applied:
• Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes.
• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
• The engine is turned off.
• Brake Hold System Problem appears on the multi-information display.
■ Turning off the automatic brake hold system
Automatic Brake
Hold Button
If you want to turn off automatic brake hold
while the system is in operation, press the
automatic brake hold button with the brake
pedal depressed.
While the system is activated, you can turn off the
engine or park the vehicle through the same
procedure as you normally do.
2 When Stopped P. 420
Whether the system is on, or the system is activated,
the automatic brake hold turns off once the engine is
off.
1Turning on the system
Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold
system before using an automated car wash.
You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves
while the automatic brake hold system is in
operation. The system generates sound while holding
the vehicle and it moves.
Driving
Goes
Off
While the system is on, press the automatic
brake hold button again.
u The automatic brake hold system
indicator goes off.
1Automatic Brake Hold
409
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
410 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
■ ABS
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.”
■ ABS operation
Driving
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE
The ABS may not function correctly if you use an
incorrect tire type and size.
When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,
there may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking is not affected, there is a
possibility of the ABS not operating. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes
to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control
during hard braking.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:
• When driving on rough road surfaces, including
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow.
• When tire chains are installed.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
410
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
411 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System
Brake Assist System
■ Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
■ Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
Driving
411
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
412 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a
pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a
potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help
minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.
■ How the system works
When to use
The camera is
located behind
the rearview
mirror.
1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
Important Safety Reminder
The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an
unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collision nor
stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your
responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering
wheel appropriately according to the driving
conditions.
The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a
vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain
conditions:
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 416
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 363
Driving
The radar sensor is
in the front grille.
The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3
mph (5 km/h) and there is a vehicle in front of you.
The CMBSTM activates when:
● The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected
in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a
collision.
● Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and there is a chance of a
collision with an oncoming detected vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.
412
* Not available on all models
1How the system works
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel alert you
when the your vehicle speed is between 19 and 62
mph (30 and 100 km/h) with an oncoming vehicle
detected in front of you.
When the CMBSTM activates, it may automatically
apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle
stops or a potential collision is not determined.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
413 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
■ When the system activates
1When the system activates
The system provides visual, audible and tactile alerts of a possible collision, and
stops if the collision is avoided.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change
lanes, etc.)
Head-up
Warning
Lights
Visual Alerts
The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect
pedestrians.
However, this pedestrian detection feature may not
activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of
your vehicle under certain conditions.
Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection
limitations from the list.
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 416
The head-up warning uses a lens located at the front
end of the dashboard.
Do not cover the lens or spill any liquid on it.
Lens
Beep
Tactile Alert
Driving
Audible Alert
At system’s earliest collision alert stage, you can change the distance (Long/
Normal/Short) between vehicles at which alerts will come on through multiinformation display setting options.
2 List of customizable options P. 106
■ Vibration alert on the steering wheel
When a potential collision to an oncoming detected vehicle is determined, the
system alerts you with rapid vibration on the steering wheel, in addition to visual and
audible alerts.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, operate the
steering wheel, etc.).
Continued
1Vibration alert on the steering wheel
Vibration alert function is disabled when the electric
power steering (EPS) system indicator comes on.
2 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator P. 74
413
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
414 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
■ Collision Alert Stages
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of
the stages before initiating the last stage.
CMBSTM
Distance between vehicles
Stage
one
Normal
Long Short
Vehicle
Ahead
Your Vehicle
Driving
Stage
two
Your
Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
The radar sensor
detects a vehicle
There is a risk of a
collision with the
vehicle ahead of
you.
The risk of a
collision has
increased, time to
respond is
reduced.
E-pretensioner
Audible & Visual WARNINGS
Steering
Wheel
Braking
—
When in Long, visual and
audible alerts come on at a
longer distance from a vehicle
ahead than in Normal setting,
and in Short, at a shorter
distance than in Normal.
In case of an
oncoming
vehicle
detected, rapid
vibration is
provided.
—
Retracts the
driver’s seat belt
gently a few times,
providing a
physical warning.
Lightly
applied
Visual and audible alerts.
Stage
three
414
Your
Vehicle
Vehicle
Ahead
Forcefully tightens
driver and front
The CMBSTM
determines that a passenger seat
belts.
collision is
unavoidable.
—
Forcefully
applied
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
415 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
■ CMBSTM On and Off
1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
Press this button until the beeper sounds to
switch the system on or off.
The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the
CMBSTM indicator will come and stay on under certain
conditions:
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 416
When the CMBSTM is off:
• The beeper sounds.
• The CMBSTM indicator in the instrument
panel comes on.
• A message on the multi-information display
reminds you that the system is off.
The CMBSTM is in the previously selected ON or
OFF setting each time you start the engine.
Driving
* Not available on all models
Continued
415
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
416 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
■ CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off and the CMBSTM indicator will come on under
certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other
conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 363
■ Environmental conditions
Driving
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between objects and the background.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians.
Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads.
416
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
417 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
■ Vehicle conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire *, etc.).
When tire chains are installed.
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
The camera temperature gets too high.
Driving with the parking brake applied.
When the radar sensor in the front grille gets dirty.
* Not available on all models
Continued
Driving
■ Detection limitations
• A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
• When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed.
• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small
vehicle.
• When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
• When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for
the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large.
• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
• Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc.
• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
• When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
• When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.
417
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
418 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only
• When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by
side.
• Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrian’s
shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.
• When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about
6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.
• When a pedestrian blends in with the background.
• When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands are raised or
they are running.
• When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group.
• When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an
unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).
Driving
418
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
419 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
■ With Little Chance of a Collision
The CMBSTM may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or
when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are:
■ When Passing
Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.
■ At an intersection
Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.
■ On a curve
When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming
vehicle is right in front of you.
For the CMBSTM to work properly:
Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.
Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for
cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a
mild detergent.
Do not put a sticker on the emblem or replace the
emblem.
If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or
removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly
impacted, turn off the system by pressing the
CMBSTM off button and take your vehicle to a dealer.
Driving
■ Through a low bridge at high speed
You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed.
1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
■ Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc.
You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train
tracks or roadside objects [such as a traffic sign and guard rail] on a curve.
* Not available on all models
419
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
420 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly,
but fully.
3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P .
4. Turn off the engine.
u The electric parking brake indicator goes off in about 15 seconds.
Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.
1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
1When Stopped
NOTICE
The following can damage the transmission:
• Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
• Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
• Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
Raise the wiper arms when snow is expected.
Driving
420
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
421 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System *
Parking Sensor System *
The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles around your vehicle, and the
beeper and audio/information screen let you know the approximate distance
between your vehicle and the obstacle.
■ The sensor location and range
Front Corner Sensors
Rear Corner Sensors
Rear Center Sensors
1Parking Sensor System *
Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is
no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.
The system may not work properly when:
• The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud or
dirt.
• The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass,
bumps, or a hill.
• The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather.
• The system is affected by some electronic devices
that generate ultrasonic wave.
• Driving in bad weather.
The system may not sense:
Within about 24 in (60 cm) or less
Within about 43 in (110 cm) or less
or sponge.
• Objects directly under the bumper.
Driving
• Thin or low objects.
• Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton,
Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.
* Not available on all models
Continued
421
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
422 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System *
■ Parking sensor system on and off
With the power mode in ON, press the
parking sensor system button to turn on or off
the system. The indicator in the button comes
on and the beeper sounds when the system is
on.
The rear center and corner sensors start to
detect an obstacle when the shift lever is in
(R , and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
Driving
422
The front corner sensors start to detect an
obstacle when the shift lever is in any position
other than (P , and the vehicle speed is less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
423 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System *
■ When the distance between your vehicle and obstacles behind becomes shorter
Length of the
intermittent beep
Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle
Indicator
Corner Sensors
Center Sensors
Moderate
—
Rear: About 43-24 in
(110-60 cm)
Short
About 24-18 in
(60-45 cm)
About 24-18 in
(60-45 cm)
Very short
About 18-14 in
(45-35 cm)
About 18-14 in
(45-35 cm)
Continuous
About 14 in
(35 cm) or less
About 14 in
(35 cm) or less
Audio/information screen
Blinks in Yellow*1
Blinks in Amber
Blinks in Red
Indicators light where the
sensor detects an obstacle.
Driving
*1: At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles.
Continued
423
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
424 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System *
■ Turning off All Rear Sensors
1. Make sure that the parking sensor system is not activated. Set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
2. Press and hold the parking sensor system button, and set the power mode to ON.
3. Keep pressing the button for ten seconds. Release the button when the indicator
in the button blinks.
4. Press the button again. The indicator in the button goes off.
u The beeper sounds twice. The rear sensors are now turned off.
To turn the rear sensors on again, follow the above procedure. The beeper sounds
three times when the rear sensors come back on.
Driving
424
1Turning off All Rear Sensors
When you shift to (R , the indicator in the parking
sensor system button blinks as a reminder that the
rear sensors have been turned off.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
425 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor *
Cross Traffic Monitor *
Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts
you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected.
The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space.
1Cross Traffic Monitor *
3 CAUTION
Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all
approaching vehicles and may not detect
an approaching vehicle at all.
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
back up the vehicle before doing so may
result in a collision.
Do not solely rely on the system when
reversing; always also use your mirrors, and
look behind and to the sides of your vehicle
before reversing.
* Not available on all models
Continued
Driving
Models with parking sensor system
The parking sensor system’s alerting buzzer overrides
the Cross Traffic Monitor buzzer when the sensors
are detecting obstacles at the closest range.
425
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
426 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor *
■ How the System Works
1Cross Traffic Monitor *
The system activates when:
• The power mode is in ON.
• The Cross Traffic Monitor is turned on.
2 Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 428
2 Customized Features P. 265
• The shift lever is in (R .
• Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or
lower.
Radar sensors:
Underneath the rear bumper
corners
Driving
When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor
alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning.
The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your
vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly
behind your vehicle.
The system does not provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from your
vehicle, and it may alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary objects.
Cross Traffic Monitor may not detect or may delay
alerting an approaching vehicle, or may alert without
an approaching vehicle under the following
conditions:
• An obstacle, such as another vehicle and a wall,
near your vehicle’s rear bumper, is blocking the
radar sensor’s scope.
• Your vehicle is moving at the speed of about 3 mph
(5 km/h) or higher.
• A vehicle is approaching at the speed other than
between about 6 mph (10 km/h) and 16 mph (25
km/h).
• The system picks up external interference such as
other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong
radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.
• Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with
snow, ice, mud or dirt.
• When there is bad weather.
• Your vehicle is on an incline.
• Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear.
• Your vehicle is reversing towards a wall, a poll, a
vehicle, and so on.
• The rear bumper or the sensors have been
improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been
deformed. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper
corner area clean.
Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels
or stickers of any kind.
426
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
427 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor *
■ When the System Detects a Vehicle
Models with surround view camera system
Rear Ground View
Rear Wide View
Models with multi-view rear camera
Normal View
Arrow Icon
Rear Normal View
Arrow Icon
Top Down View
If
on the lower right changes to
(amber) when
the shift lever is in (R , mud snow or ice, etc. may
have accumulated in the vicinity of the sensor. The
system is temporarily canceled. Check the bumper
corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly clean
the area if necessary.
If
(amber) comes on when the shift lever is in (R ,
there may be a problem with the Cross Traffic
Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
If the display remains the same with the shift lever in
(R , there may be a problem with the rear camera
system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system.
Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
Driving
Wide View
1When the System Detects a Vehicle
An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the audio/information
screen.
Continued
427
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
428 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor *
■ Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off
You can switch on and off the system using
the audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 265
Icon
Driving
428
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
429 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Multi-View Rear Camera *
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display
automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R .
■ Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
Wide View Mode
Guidelines
Bumper
Normal View Mode
Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
Approx. 118 inches (3 m)
You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display. Press the
interface dial to switch the angle.
If Top View is last used before you turn the power mode to OFF, Wide mode is
selected next time you turn the power on and move the shift lever to (R .
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features P. 265
Driving
Top Down View Mode
Approx. 79 inches (2 m)
* Not available on all models
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
Camera
Approx. 39 inches (1 m)
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
Fixed Guideline
On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R .
Off: Guidelines do not appear when the dynamic
guideline is off.
Dynamic Guideline
On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel
direction.
Off: Guidelines do not move.
429
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
430 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Surround View Camera System *
Is a four camera system that views areas commonly known as “blind spots” from
different angles, then displays the images on the audio/information screen. This
system can be used to:
• Check the right and left sides of the vehicle while crossing at intersections with
poor visibility (fog, heavy rain, obstructed view, etc.).
2 Checking from the front wide view at intersections P. 438
• Check for obstacles in front of the vehicle when parking or maneuvering in
confined areas.
2 Checking the sides of your vehicle P. 438
• Check for obstacles when you are moving in (R .
2 Checking for Obstacles at the Back of Your Vehicle P. 434
• Assist you when backing into or parallel parking the vehicle in a lined parking
space.
2 Reversing into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines P. 435
2 Parallel Parking into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines P. 436
1Surround View Camera System *
3 WARNING
Failure to visually assess the area around
the vehicle (directly or by use of the
mirrors) may result in a crash causing
serious injury or death.
The areas shown in the surround view
camera system display are limited. The
display may not show all pedestrians or
other objects around your vehicle.
Driving
Do not solely rely only on the surround
view camera system display to assess
whether it is safe to move your vehicle.
3 WARNING
Failure to pay proper attention to your
surroundings while driving may result in a
crash causing serious injury or death.
To help mitigate the chances of a collision,
only look at the surround view camera
system display when it is safe to do so.
430
* Not available on all models
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
431 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuSurround View Camera System * uDisplaying an Image From the Surround View Cameras
Displaying an Image From the Surround View Cameras
■ For frontal views:
Press the CAMERA button when the vehicle is
stationary or moving at 12 mph (20 km/h) or
slower. Press the button again or the interface
dial to switch camera views.
CAMERA
Button
■ For rear reviews:
Move the shift lever to (R when the vehicle is
stationary. Press the CAMERA button or the
interface dial to switch to rear view mode.
1Surround View Camera System *
The surround view camera system does not eliminate
all blind spots. The system is for your convenience
only.
Always keep the camera lenses clean and free from
debris.
The navigation system is disabled when the shift lever
is in (R .
You can customize the display setting.
2 Customized Features P. 265
Driving
CAMERA
Button
* Not available on all models
Continued
431
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
432 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuSurround View Camera System * uDisplaying an Image From the Surround View Cameras
■ Camera Locations and Images
Ground View
An overhead view created by the
combination of images captured
by four cameras.
Front Ground View
CAMERA
Button
CAMERA Button
CAMERA Button
Front Wide View
CAMERA
Button
Rear
Wide
View
CAMERA Button
Driving
Right Side View
Rear
Ground
View
Sideview Camera
(Passenger side)
Press and
hold
CAMERA Left and Right
button. Side View
Sideview Camera
(Driver side)
CAMERA Button
Rear
Normal
View
Front-view Camera
The unique surround view camera lenses make distances appear
differently than they actually are - objects seen on the audio/information Rearview Camera
screen may appear closer or further away, and may be distorted. This
becomes more apparent the further away an object is from your vehicle.
432
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
433 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuSurround View Camera System * uDisplaying an Image From the Surround View Cameras
■ Reference Lines and Guides
Following can be displayed when the system is on.
Guide lines: Help you to get a sense of a distance between your vehicle and the
rear surroundings. The distance may appear differently than the actual distance.
Projection lines: Indicate vehicle direction while the steering wheel is in the current
position.
Operating the navigation system or audio system
while the surround view camera system screen is
displayed cancels the surround view camera system
screen and starts up the navigation system screen.
If you press the CAMERA button while the vehicle
speed is more than 15 mph (25 km/h), the standby
screen appears.
When the vehicle speed is reduced below 12 mph (20
km/h), the screen switches to a surround view camera
system image.
1Reference Lines and Guides
The positions/distances indicated by the guide lines
and camera views on the display may differ from the
actual positions/distances due to the changes in the
vehicle height, road conditions, and other factors.
The guide lines should be used as a reference only.
Driving
Depending on your parking situation, you can select Back-in left park guidance,
Back-in right park guidance, Left parallel park guidance, or Right parallel
park guidance from Parking Guideline menu to display:
Initial position guide: Marks the point
where your vehicle is headed when reversing.
Steering position alignment guide:
Indicates when to change the steering wheel
position.
1Displaying an Image From the Surround View Cameras
The guide lines can be turned on and off using the
audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 265
If you turn the guide lines off, they remain off until
you turn them back on.
To see the guidance on how to use the reference
lines and guides while they appear on the display,
press and hold the CAMERA button or the interface
dial. To close the guidance, press and hold the
CAMERA button or the interface dial again, or press
the BACK button.
433
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
434 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuSurround View Camera System * uWhen Parking Your Vehicle
When Parking Your Vehicle
■ Checking for Obstacles at the Back of Your Vehicle
The display automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to
(R .
Rear Normal View
Rear Wide View
Driving
20 inches
(50 cm)
39 inches (1 m)
79 inches (2 m)
Not folded
Folded
1Checking for Obstacles at the Back of Your Vehicle
When moving the shift lever from/to (R , you may
experience a delay in switching between the audio/
information screen and a rear view image.
118 inches
(3 m)
Approximate distances the
projection lines indicate
118 inches
(3 m)
Blind spots
appear in
black.
The projection lines
appear approx. 10
inches (25 cm) outside
the vehicle body.
Press the CAMERA
button.
434
The ground view can be displayed even with the door
mirrors folded. However, the viewable angle and
blind spot change.
Do not refer to the surround view camera system
when the door mirrors are folded.
Rear Ground View
When the
steering wheel is
turned more
than 90 degrees.
Approximate distances
the guide lines indicate
1When Parking Your Vehicle
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
435 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuSurround View Camera System * uWhen Parking Your Vehicle
■ Reversing into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines
Steering position alignment
guide enters the parking
space. (Step 4)
Initial
Positioning
Guide
C
B
1Reversing into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines
If the steering position alignment guide does not fit in
the parking lines, the parking space is too small for
the vehicle.
Reference lines can be useful only when the parking
space is in a rectangular shape with straight parking
marks and when vehicles in the next parking spaces
are within the spaces.
Steering Position
Alignment Guide
A
Must be wider than approx. 8 feet (2.5 m)
Make sure the guides
The initial positioning
are within the parking
guide must come here.
space when reversing.
Must be wider than approx. 20 feet (6 m)
Continued
Driving
1. With your vehicle at a complete stop, press the CAMERA button, then press the
MENU button. Rotate
to select Back- in left park guidance or Back-in right
park guidance. Press .
2. Move the vehicle forward perpendicular to the parking space and stop where the
initial positioning guide in the display is at the center of the parking space.
3. Turn the steering wheel fully to the left (if the parking space is on the passenger
side) at a stop.
u The steering position alignment guide is displayed.
4. Slowly move the vehicle forward.
u Stop the vehicle when the steering position alignment guide enters the parking space.
5. Turn the steering wheel fully to the right (if the parking space is on the passenger
side) at a stop. Start reversing the vehicle slowly.
6. Stop the vehicle when it is parallel to the parking lines.
7. Return the steering wheel to its center position, then reverse the vehicle slowly
until it is parked within the space.
435
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
436 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuSurround View Camera System * uWhen Parking Your Vehicle
■ Parallel Parking into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines
B
A
Must be
wider than
approx. 8
feet (2.5 m)
C
Initial
positioning
guide
overlaps the
front corner
of the space.
(Step 2)
Initial
Positioning
Guide
Steering Position
Alignment Guide
Must be longer than approx. 21 feet (6.5 m)
Must be wider than approx. 20 feet (6 m)
Driving
436
1. Press the CAMERA button, then press the MENU button. Rotate
to select
Left parallel park guidance or Right Parallel park guidance. Press .
2. Move the vehicle forward parallel to the parking space and stop when the initial
positioning guide shown in the display overlaps the front corner of the space.
3. Turn the steering wheel fully to the right (if the parking space is on the passenger
side) at a stop.
u The steering position alignment guide is displayed.
4. Slowly reverse the vehicle.
u Stop the vehicle when the steering position alignment guide overlaps the
sideline of the parking space.
5. Turn the steering wheel fully to the left (if the parking space is on the passenger
side) at a stop. Reverse the vehicle slowly.
6. Stop the vehicle when it is parallel to the parking lines.
7. Return the steering wheel to its center position, then reverse the vehicle slowly
until it is parked within the space.
1 Parallel Parking into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines
Reference lines can be useful only when the parking
space is in a rectangular shape with straight parking
marks and when vehicles in the next parking spaces
are within the spaces.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
437 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuSurround View Camera System * uWhen Parking Your Vehicle
■ Checking for the Sides of Your Vehicle
1Checking for the Sides of Your Vehicle
You can display the front ground view screen using all the four cameras for the
system. Pressing the CAMERA button when the vehicle speed is at below 12 mph
(20 km/h) changes the image as follows.
A Combined Image of
Both Side Views
When the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h),
the front or side view on the screen automatically
switches to the audio information screen. The front
or side view screen resumes when the vehicle speed
is reduced below 12 mph (20 km/h).
0 mph (0 km/h)
Front Wide View
Press and hold the
CAMERA button.
Approximate distance
the reference line
indicates.
Blind spots
appear in black.
Camera
Screen
Audio/information
Screen
Camera
Screen
Audio/information
Screen
0 mph (0 km/h)
Down
12 mph (20 km/h)
Up
Driving
When the
steering wheel
is turned.
Side
View
15 mph (25 km/h)
Front Ground View
Projection lines
appear.
approx. 3 feet (1 m)
Press the CAMERA
button.
Continued
437
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
438 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuSurround View Camera System * uWhen Parking Your Vehicle
■ Checking from the front wide view at intersections
1Checking from the front wide view at intersections
The front wide view screen is useful when you need to check for vehicles crossing
from either direction at an intersection with poor visibility.
The angle
provided by the
front wide view
screen is 180
degrees.
Front Wide View Screen
When the vehicle
speed is below 12
mph (20 km/h),
press the
CAMERA button
repeatedly until
the front wide
view comes on.
■ Checking the sides of your vehicle
1Checking the sides of your vehicle
The side view screens are convenient when you pull over at a curb or tollbooth, or
slowly pass by oncoming vehicles on a narrow road.
Driving
Side Views
The images
from the side
cameras.
Side View Screen
12 inches
(30 cm)
Press and hold the
CAMERA button.
12 inches
(30 cm)
438
12 inches
(30 cm)
The front wide view image is a wide-angled view. The
displayed image will be largely distorted, and objects
may appear closer or more distant than they actually
are.
Approximate distance
the projection lines
indicate is 12 inches (30
cm) from the vehicle.
When the door mirrors are folded, the side views
cannot be displayed.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
439 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuSurround View Camera System * uWhen Parking Your Vehicle
■ Surround View Camera System Limitations
The system may not work properly under the following conditions.
Conditions
The images may not
appear clearly when:
●
●
●
●
●
●
You activate the system in bad weather (heavy rain, Do not use the surround view camera system but rely
snow, fog, etc.) or in the dark.
only on visual confirmation until the conditions allow
Camera temperatures are high.
the system to work properly.
A sudden change between light and dark such as an
entrance or exit of a tunnel.
You drive into the sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk.)
A camera lens is covered with dirt, moisture, or
debris.
A camera lens is scratched.
Clean camera lenses with a soft cloth moisturized with
water, mild detergent or glass cleaner.
The audio/information screen is dirty.
Wipe off the screen using a soft dry cloth.
A camera or the area around the camera has been
severely impacted.
Do not use the surround view camera system and
contact a dealer.
Driving
A camera angle is
altered.
Solutions
An error message is displayed while the surround view camera system is in use.
439
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
440 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Refueling
Fuel Information
■ Fuel recommendation
Unleaded premium gasoline, pump octane number 91 or higher
Use of lower octane gasoline can cause occasional metallic knocking noise in the
engine and will result in decreased engine performance.
Use of gasoline with a pump octane less than 87 can lead to engine damage.
■ Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Acura
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.
Driving
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit Acura Owners at owners.acura.com. In
Canada, visit www.acura.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more
information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
■ Fuel tank capacity: 18.5 US gal (70 liters)
440
1Fuel Information
NOTICE
We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
441 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
How to Refuel
Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel fill cap. You can insert the filler nozzle
directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler
nozzle.
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
Press
3. Press the fuel fill door release button.
u The fuel fill door opens.
3 WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
Only a service station filler nozzle can be used.
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.
Driving
4. Place the end of the filler nozzle on the
lower part of filler opening, then insert it
slowly and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the filler
nozzle goes down along with the filler
pipe.
u Keep the filler nozzle level.
u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will
click off automatically.
u After filling, wait about five seconds
before removing the filler nozzle.
5. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
1How to Refuel
If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.
If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable
container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.
2 Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
P. 534
441
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
442 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy
Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your
driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and
other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
■ Maintenance and Fuel Economy
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
multi-information display.
• Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
• Maintain the specified tire pressure.
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
Driving
442
1Improving Fuel Economy
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
Miles driven
Gallons of
fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100
Liters of
fuel
Kilometers
driven
L per 100 km
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
443 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
• Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or
backs of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the
vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags
deploy.
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 526
• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Acura components that can affect its
handling, stability, and reliability.
3 WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
Acura Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
Driving
Modifications
1Accessories and Modifications
Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is
properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province,
territory, and local regulations.
443
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
444
444 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
445 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 446
Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 447
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 448
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 449
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 454
Opening the Hood ........................... 455
Engine Compartment Cover............. 456
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 457
Oil Check ......................................... 458
Adding Engine Oil ............................ 459
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 460
Engine Coolant ................................ 462
Transmission Fluid............................ 464
Brake Fluid....................................... 465
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 465
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 466
Checking and Maintaining Wiper
Blades .......................................... 472
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 475
Tire and Loading Information Label ...... 476
Tire Labeling .................................... 476
Wear Indicators ............................... 480
Tire Service Life................................ 480
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 481
Tire Rotation.................................... 482
Winter Tires ..................................... 483
Battery............................................... 484
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery ........... 485
Climate Control System Maintenance .... 487
Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 488
Exterior Care.................................... 490
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......478
445
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
446 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.) Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for detailed maintenance and
inspection information.
■ Types of Inspection and Maintenance
■ Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.
■ Periodic inspections
• Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Brake Fluid P. 465
• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 475
Maintenance
446
• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
1Inspection and Maintenance
U.S. models
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the multi-information display.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 452
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 545
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 466
• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 472
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
447 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform
a given task.
■ Maintenance Safety
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.
• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
u Operate the engine only when there is sufficient ventilation.
• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.
3 WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner’s manual.
3 WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner’s manual.
Maintenance
■ Vehicle Safety
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
447
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
448 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Acura genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Acura genuine parts are manufactured according to the same
high quality standards used in Acura vehicles.
Maintenance
448
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
449 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Maintenance MinderTM
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear the multi-information display every time you set the power mode to ON. The
messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle
to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.
Maintenance
449
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
450 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
To Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Displaying the Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the
engine oil, appear on the multi-information display.
You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Roll the right selector wheel until the engine oil life appears on the multiinformation display.
Remaining Engine Oil Life
Maintenance Service Items
Maintenance
450
Right Selector Wheel
1Displaying the Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 to 91
90 to 81
80 to 71
70 to 61
60 to 51
50 to 41
40 to 31
30 to 21
20 to 16
15 to 11
10 to 6
5 to 1
0
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
451 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information
Display
Oil Life Display
Explanation
Information
Maintenance Due Soon
15 %
The remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6
percent. Once you switch the display
by rolling the right selector wheel, this
message will go off.
The engine oil is approaching the end
of its service life, and the maintenance
items should be inspected and
serviced soon.
Maintenance Due Now
5%
The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 The engine oil has almost reached the
percent. Roll the right selector wheel end of its service life, and the
maintenance items should be
to switch to another display.
inspected and serviced as soon as
possible.
Maintenance Past Due
Negative Distance
The remaining engine oil life has
The engine oil life has passed.
passed its service life, and a negative The maintenance items must be
distance appears after driving over 10 inspected and serviced immediately.
miles (U.S. models) or 10 km
(Canadian models). Roll the right
selector wheel to switch to another
display.
The system message indicator (
Maintenance
Maintenance Message
) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.
Continued
451
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
452 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Maintenance Service Items
1Maintenance Service Items
• Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
System Message
Indicator
• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
Maintenance Minder Message
km).
• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
Sub Items
they are noisy.
Main Item
CODE
A
B
●
●
●
●
Maintenance
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, boots, and
drain plug
Inspect suspension components
Inspect driveshaft boots
Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
Inspect exhaust system#
Inspect fuel lines and connections#
Check expiration information for Temporary Tire
Repair Kit bottle
*1: If a message Maintenance Due Now does not appear more than 12 months after the display is
reset, change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
452
CODE
1
2
●
●
●
3
4
●
●
●
●
5
●
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Replace transmission fluid
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump*4
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures (under 20°F, -29°C), replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
453 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Resetting the Display
1Resetting the Display
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
Maintenance Item Codes
Engine Oil Life
NOTICE
Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect
maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
Right Selector
Wheel
2 Customized Features P. 103
3. Push the right selector wheel.
u The oil life reset mode is displayed on the multi-information display.
4. Select Reset with the right selector wheel, then push the right selector wheel.
u The displayed maintenance items disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.
To cancel the oil life reset mode, select Cancel, then push the right selector wheel.
Maintenance
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Go to the Maintenance Info. group.
453
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
454 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange Loop)
Washer Fluid
(Black Cap)
Battery
Maintenance
Engine Coolant Reserve
Tank
Radiator Cap
454
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
455 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
Opening the Hood
Hood Release Handle
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
u The hood will pop up slightly.
Pull
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE
Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage
either the hood or the wipers.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.
3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center
of the hood to release the lock mechanism,
and open the hood.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
Lever
When closing, lower it to approximately 12
inches (30 cm), then press down firmly with
your hands.
Maintenance
4. Lift the hood up most of the way.
u The hydraulic supports will lift it up the
rest of the way and hold it up.
455
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
456 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Compartment Cover
Engine Compartment Cover
The component parts in the engine compartment are protected by a cover.
You may need to remove the cover when you perform certain maintenance work.
To remove the cover:
1Engine Compartment Cover
Holding clip (A-type)
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center
pin to remove the clip.
Clip (A)
Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push
until it is flat.
Maintenance
456
Engine Compartment Cover
Remove the holding clips
Push until the
pin is flat
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
457 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Recommended Engine Oil
• Genuine Acura Motor Oil
• Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.
This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving
and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Use a Genuine Acura Motor Oil or another
commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown here.
Maintenance
Ambient Temperature
■ Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.
457
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
458 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the
oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
Maintenance
458
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil being careful not to overfill.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
459 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
1Adding Engine Oil
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil
may damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE
Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
engine damage.
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Maintenance
459
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
460 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the multiinformation display.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
3. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
Washer
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE
You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Drain Bolt
Maintenance
460
Oil Filter
4. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
5. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the oil filter rubber seal.
7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
your work.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
461 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
8. Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 L)
9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and start the engine.
10. Run the engine for a few minutes, and then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
11. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the
dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.
Maintenance
461
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
462 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Specified coolant: Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
■ Reserve Tank
1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.
MAX
1Engine Coolant
NOTICE
If temperatures consistently below -22°F (-30°C) are
expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to
a higher concentration. Consult a dealer for more
information.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Acura coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction
or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled
with Acura antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.
Maintenance
462
Reserve
Tank
MIN
2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark,
add the specified coolant until it reaches
the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
463 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
■ Radiator
1Radiator
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Remove the engine compartment cover.
2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 456
Radiator Cap
3. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise to
relieve any pressure in the cooling system.
Do not push the cap down when turning.
4. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise to remove it.
5. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
6. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.
7. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it
reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
NOTICE
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.
Maintenance
463
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
464 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Transmission Fluid
■ Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Acura ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Do not attempt to check or change the automatic transmission fluid yourself. The
location of the ATF dipstick and fill increases the likelihood that you could be burned
when trying to check or change the ATF.
Maintenance
464
1Automatic Transmission Fluid
NOTICE
Do not mix Acura ATF DW-1 with other
transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than Acura ATF DW1 may adversely affect the operation and durability of
your vehicle’s transmission, and damage the
transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to Acura ATF DW-1 is not covered
by Acura’s new vehicle warranty.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
465 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid
Brake Fluid
Specified fluid: Acura Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
NOTICE
■ Checking the Brake Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
MAX
1Brake Fluid
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
MIN
Brake Reservoir
Using any non-Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Acura Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn
brake pads as soon as possible.
If the washer fluid is low, a message appears on the multi-information display.
Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.
Maintenance
Refilling Window Washer Fluid
465
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
466 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlight Bulbs
Headlight bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Acura dealer inspect and replace
the light assembly.
Maintenance
466
1Headlight Bulbs
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted
at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
467 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs
Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Front Turn Signal/Parking Light: 27/8 W (Amber)
1Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs
Holding clip (A-type)
1. Remove the holding clips (A).
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center
pin to remove the clip.
2. Push up the under cover.
3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
4. Push in the old bulb, rotate to the left until
it unlocks, and remove.
5. Insert a new bulb.
Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push
until it is flat.
Clips (A)
Under
Cover
Push until the
pin is flat.
Maintenance
Socket
Bulb
467
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
468 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Side Marker Light Bulbs
Front Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Front Side Marker Light: 2 CP
Clip (A)
Holding clip (B-type)
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the
opposite side from the light being replaced.
Passenger’s side: Turn the steering wheel
to the left.
Driver’s side: Turn the steering wheel to
the right.
2. Remove the holding clips (A) and (B), pull
the inner fender back.
Inner Fender
When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver,
then lift and remove the clip.
Clip
Clips (B)
3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it,
then remove the old bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.
Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is
flat.
Maintenance
Push until the
pin is flat.
Bulb
Socket
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Light Bulbs
Door mirrors have the side turn lights. Have an authorized Acura dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
468
1Front Side Marker Light Bulbs
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
469 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W
1. Remove the cover.
Cover
2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it,
then remove the old bulb.
3. Insert a new bulb.
Socket
Brake/Taillight and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Bulb
Brake/taillight and rear side marker light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized
Acura dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
469
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
470 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillight Bulbs
Taillight Bulbs
Taillight bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Acura dealer inspect and replace the
light assembly.
Back-Up Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Back-Up Light: 16 W
1. Remove the cover.
Cover
Maintenance
Bulb
Socket
470
2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it,
then remove the old bulb.
3. Insert a new bulb.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
471 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs
Rear License Plate Light Bulbs
Rear license plate light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Acura dealer inspect
and replace the light assembly.
High-Mount Brake Light Bulbs
High-mount brake light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Acura dealer inspect
and replace the light assembly.
Door Outer Handle Ambient Light Bulbs
Door outer handle ambient light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Acura
dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Maintenance
471
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
472 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces
of the blade may scratch the window glass.
Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
2. While holding the wiper switch in the
MIST position, set the power mode to ON,
then to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
u Both wiper arms are set to the
maintenance position as shown in the
image.
3. Lift both wiper arms.
Maintenance
472
1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
windshield.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
473 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber
4. Press and hold the tab, then slide the
blade out from the wiper arm.
Tab
Wiper
Blade
5. Pull the end of the wiper blade to the
direction of the arrow in the image until it
unfastens from the holder’s end cap.
End Cap at
the bottom
Maintenance
6. Pull the wiper blade to the opposite
direction to slide it out from its holder.
Holder
Continued
473
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
474 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber
Wiper
Blade
Holder
Cap
Maintenance
474
7. Insert the flat side of the new wiper blade
onto the bottom part of the holder. Insert
the blade all the way.
8. Install the end of the wiper blade into the
cap.
9. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm
until it locks.
10. Lower both wiper arms.
11. Set the power mode to ON and hold the
wiper switch in the MIST position until
both wiper arms return to the standard
position.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
475 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
■ Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
■ Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
• Excessive tread wear.
3 WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4 – 6 psi (30 – 40 kPa, 0.3 – 0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than
if checked when cold.
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.
Maintenance
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all
tires. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2)
per month.
1Checking Tires
Vehicles with optional spare tire kit
Measure the spare tire pressure once a month or
before long trips.
2 Wear Indicators P. 480
• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
475
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
476 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Label
Example
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
a The number of people your vehicle can carry.
b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare, if
equipped.
d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare, if equipped.
Tire Labeling
Example
Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)
The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described below.
Maintenance
Maximum
Tire Load
Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size
■ Tire Sizes
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
476
1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
245/40R19 98W
245: Tire width in millimeters.
40: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
19: Rim diameter in inches.
98: Load index (a numerical code associated with the
maximum load the tire can carry).
W: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
477 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling
■ Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
■ Glossary of Tire Terminology
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
Maintenance
Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
477
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
478 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.
■ Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
Maintenance
478
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
479 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
■ Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
1Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
Maintenance
■ Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
1Traction
479
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
480 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators
Wear Indicators
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark
The groove where the wear indicator is
located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.
1Checking Tires
High speed driving
We recommend that you do not drive faster than the
posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you drive
at sustained high speeds (over 118 mph or 190 km/
h), adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below to
avoid excessive heat build up and sudden tire failure.
Tire Size
Pressure
Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
Maintenance
480
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare *, should be removed from service after 10
years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
* Not available on all models
245/40R19 98W
Front: 38 psi (260 kPa, 2.7 kgf/cm2)
Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2)
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
481 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause the ABS and vehicle stability assist (VSA®)
system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3 WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.
If you replace a wheel, only use TPMS specified wheels approved for your vehicle.
Maintenance
481
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
482 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the multi-information
display helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
■ Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
Front
1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
FRONT
Direction Mark
■ Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
Maintenance
482
Front
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
483 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uWinter Tires
Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires,
or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when
driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires:
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
• Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
• Install them on the front tires only.
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
• Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
• Drive slowly.
3 WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
NOTICE
Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.
Maintenance
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1040
1Winter Tires
483
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
484 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Battery
Checking the Battery
Check the battery terminals for corrosion
monthly.
The battery condition is being monitored by
the sensor on the negative terminal. If there is
a problem with the sensor, the warning
message on multi-information display will let
you know. Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead:
• The audio system is disabled.
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 194
• The clock resets.
2 Clock P. 114
• The navigation system is disabled.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Maintenance
Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.
1Battery
3 WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery maintenance,
wear protective clothing and a face shield,
or have a skilled technician do it.
WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Clean terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry
the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help
prevent future corrosion.
When replacing the battery, the replacement must be
of the same specifications.
Please consult a dealer for more information.
484
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
485 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
Battery type: CR2032
1Replacing the Button Battery
NOTICE
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
1. Remove the built-in key.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.
Battery
2. Remove the upper half of the cover by
carefully prying on the edge with a coin.
u Remove carefully to avoid losing the
buttons.
u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the keyless access remote.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
Maintenance
Continued
485
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
486 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery
Models with remote control engine start system
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
Battery type: CR2032
1. Remove the built-in key.
u As a convenience, lightly place masking
tape over the remote buttons to hold
them in place.
Battery
Maintenance
486
2. Remove the upper half by carefully prying
on the edge with a coin.
u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the transmitter.
3. Press down on the center of the assembly
and remove the battery.
u When removing the button battery, be
careful not to touch parts around it.
4. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
1Replacing the Button Battery
Models with remote control engine start system
NOTICE
The Remote transmitter is equipped with two
batteries: A standard replaceable CR2032 coin
button battery and an integral non-replaceable
rechargeable battery. To prevent permanent damage
to the rechargeable battery, replace the CR2032
battery every three to four years.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
487 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Climate Control System Maintenance
Dust and Pollen Filter
The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects
pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let
you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the climate control system
deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up
easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please
contact a dealer for replacement.
Maintenance
487
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
488 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
■ Cleaning Seat Belts
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Opening
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.
Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if
liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches.
Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire
inside the vehicle.
If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.
Maintenance
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
away using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
■ Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
488
1Interior Care
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
489 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCleaninguInterior Care
■ Floor Mats
1Floor Mats
Unlock
Lock
The floor mats hook over the floor anchors,
which keep the mats from sliding forward. To
remove the mats for cleaning, turn the anchor
knobs to the unlock position. When
reinstalling the mats after cleaning, turn the
knobs to the lock position.
If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mat.
■ Maintaining Genuine Leather
Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats
and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and
10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or
dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
Maintenance
489
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
490 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
■ Washing the Vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can
cause a malfunction.
■ Using an Automated Car Wash
• Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
• Fold in the door mirrors.
• Turn off the automatic intermittent wipers *.
Air Intake Vents
Maintenance
■ Using High Pressure Cleaners
• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior.
• Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
1Applying Wax
■ Applying Wax
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.
490
* Not available on all models
NOTICE
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe
away spills immediately.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
491 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuCleaninguExterior Care
■ Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.
■ Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
■ Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly.
Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or
a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that
helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily
if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash.
Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant
enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to
vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural
processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.
Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame
surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.
However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops
building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Maintenance
■ Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
491
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
492
492 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
493 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools
Types of Tools .................................. 494
If a Tire Goes Flat
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire....... 495
Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 507
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine ........................ 513
If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is
Weak ............................................. 514
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 515
Jump Starting.................................... 516
Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 519
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 520
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes
On ............................................. 522
If the Charging System Indicator Comes
On ................................................. 522
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 523
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On..523
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On .............................. 524
If the Electric Parking Brake System Indicator
Comes On............................................. 524
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks ....................... 525
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 526
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 530
Emergency Towing........................... 531
When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill
Door................................................. 532
When You Cannot Open the Trunk .....533
Refueling
Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container ... 534
493
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
494 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Tools
Types of Tools
Vehicles with temporary tire repair kit
1Types of Tools
The tools are stored in the trunk.
Flat-tip Screwdriver
Towing Hook
Grip
Funnel
Vehicles with optional spare tire kit
Handling the Unexpected
Flat-tip Screwdriver
Wheel Nut Wrench/
Jack Handle
Tool Case
Jack Handle Bar
Vehicle with temporary tire repair
kit is shown.
Jack
494
Grip
Funnel
Towing Hook
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
495 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
If a Tire Goes Flat
Vehicles with temporary tire repair kit
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
1Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
If the tire has a large cut or is otherwise severely damaged, you will need to have the
vehicle towed. If the tire only has a small puncture, from a nail for instance, you can
use the temporary tire repair kit so that you can drive to the nearest service station
for a more permanent repair.
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then stop in a safe place.
Contact
Area
When the puncture is:
Kit Use
Smaller than 3/16 inch
(4 mm)
Yes
Larger than 3/16 inch
(4 mm)
No
• Damage has been caused by driving with the tire
extremely under inflated.
• The tire bead is no longer seated.
• The rim is damaged.
Handling the Unexpected
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level, and non-slippery surface and apply the parking
brake.
2. Move the shift lever to (P .
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
The kit should not be used in the following situations.
Instead, contact a dealer or a roadside assistant to
have the vehicle towed.
• The tire sealant has expired.
• More than one tire is punctured.
• The puncture or cut is larger than 3/16 inch (4 mm).
• The tire side wall is damaged or the puncture is
outside the contact area.
Do not remove a nail or screw that punctured the
tire. If you remove it from the tire, you may not be
able to repair the puncture using the kit.
NOTICE
Do not use a puncture-repairing agent other than the
one provided in the kit that came with your vehicle. If
a different agent is used, you may permanently
damage the tire pressure sensor.
Continued
495
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
496 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
■ Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
496
Pressure Gauge
AIR ONLY side
Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
Inflator Switch
Tire Sealant
Expiration Date
Pressure Relief
Button
Instruction Manual
SEALANT/AIR side
Power Plug
Selector Switch
Air Only Hose (Black)
Repair Notification Label
Speed Restriction Label
U.S.
U.S.
Canada
Canada
1Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire
Repair notification label and speed restriction label
are applied to the side of temporary tire repair kit.
When making a temporary repair, carefully read the
instruction manual provided with the kit.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
497 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
1. Pull the handle on the trunk floor lid and
open the lid.
2. Hook the handle to the edge of the trunk
opening.
Handle
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
3. Take the kit out of the case.
4. Place the kit face up, on flat ground near
the flat tire, and away from traffic. Do not
place the kit on its side.
497
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
498 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
■ Injecting Sealant and Air
Valve Cap
1Injecting Sealant and Air
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve
stem.
3 WARNING
Tire sealant contains substances that are
harmful and can be fatal if swallowed.
If accidentally swallowed, do not induce
vomiting. Drink plenty of water and get
medical attention immediately.
Valve Stem
Handling the Unexpected
2. Remove the sealant/air hose from the
packaging.
Sealant/Air Hose
In cold temperatures, the sealant may not flow easily.
In this situation, warm it up for five minutes before
using.
The sealant can permanently stain clothing and other
materials. Be careful during handling and wipe away
any spills immediately.
Sealant/Air Hose
Valve Stem
498
For skin or eye contact, flush with cool
water and get medical attention if
necessary.
3. Attach the sealant/air hose onto the tire
valve stem. Screw it until it is tight.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
499 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
4. Plug in the compressor to the accessory
power socket.
u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a
door or window.
u Do not plug any other electronic
devices into other accessory power
sockets.
1Injecting Sealant and Air
3 WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an
enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon
monoxide.
2 Accessory Power Sockets P. 171
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 64
6. Turn the selector switch to SEALANT/
AIR.
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
Only run the engine to power the air
compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
NOTICE
Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit
compressor for more than 15 minutes. The
compressor can overheat and become permanently
damaged.
Until the sealant injection is complete, the pressure
shown on the pressure gauge will appear higher than
actual. After the sealant injection is complete the
pressure will drop and then begin to rise again as the
tire is inflated with air. This is normal. To accurately
measure the air pressure using the gauge, turn the air
compressor off only after the sealant injection is
complete.
SEALANT/AIR side
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
5. Start the engine.
u Keep the engine running while injecting
sealant and air.
499
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
500 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Pressure Gauge
ON
OFF
Handling the Unexpected
500
Sealant/Air Hose
Valve Stem
7. Press the inflator switch to turn on the
compressor.
u The compressor starts injecting sealant
and air into the tire.
8. When the sealant injection is complete,
continue to add air.
9. After the air pressure reaches front:35 psi
(240 kPa)/rear:33 psi (230 kPa), turn off
the kit.
u To check the pressure, occasionally turn
off the compressor and read the gauge.
10. Unplug the power plug from the accessory
power socket.
11. Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire
valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
12. Press the pressure relief button until the
gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
1Injecting Sealant and Air
If the required air pressure is not reached within 15
minutes, the tire may be too severely damaged for
the kit to provide the necessary seal and your vehicle
will need to be towed.
See an Acura dealer for a replacement sealant bottle
and proper disposal of an empty bottle.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
501 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Repair Notification Label
U.S.
13. Apply the repair notification label to the
flat surface of the wheel.
u The wheel surface must be clean to
ensure the label adheres properly.
Canada
U.S.
Canada
1. Apply the speed restriction label to the
location as shown.
2. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes.
u Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
3. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Handling the Unexpected
■ Distributing the Sealant in the Tire
Speed Restriction Label
Continued
501
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
502 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
4. Recheck the air pressure using the air only
hose on the compressor.
5. Turn the selector switch to AIR ONLY.
u Do not turn the air compressor on to
check the pressure.
2 Inflating an Under-inflated Tire P. 504
Air Only Hose
Handling the Unexpected
502
6. If the air pressure is
• Less than 19 psi (130 kPa):
Do not add air or continue driving. The leak
is too severe. Call for help and have your
vehicle towed.
2 Emergency Towing P. 531
• Front:35 psi (240 kPa)/rear:33 psi (230
kPa) or more:
Continue driving for another 10 minutes or
until you reach the nearest service station.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
u If the air pressure does not go down after
the 10 minute driving, you do not need
to check the pressure any more.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
503 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
• Greater than 19 psi (130 kPa), but less
than front:35 psi (240 kPa)/rear:33 psi
(230 kPa):
Turn the air compressor on to inflate the
tire until the tire pressure reaches front:35
psi (240 kPa)/rear:33 psi (230 kPa).
2 Inflating an Under-inflated Tire P. 504
ON
7. Press the pressure relief button until the
gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
8. Repackage and properly stow the kit.
3 WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an
enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon
monoxide.
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
Only run the engine to power the air
compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
Handling the Unexpected
AIR ONLY
side
Then drive carefully for 10 more minutes or
until you reach the nearest service station.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
u You should repeat this procedure as long
as the air pressure is within this range.
1Distributing the Sealant in the Tire
Pressure Relief Button
Continued
503
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
504 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
■ Inflating an Under-inflated Tire
You can use the kit to inflate a non-punctured under-inflated tire.
1. Open the trunk floor lid.
2 Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair
the Flat Tire P. 496
2. Remove the kit from the case.
3. Place the kit, face up, on flat ground near
the flat tire, away from traffic. Do not
place the kit on its side.
4. Remove the air only hose from the kit.
Handling the Unexpected
Air Only Hose
5. Remove the valve cap.
Valve Cap
Air Only Hose
Valve Stem
504
6. Attach the air only hose onto the tire valve
stem. Screw it until it is tight.
1Inflating an Under-inflated Tire
NOTICE
Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit
compressor for more than 15 minutes. The
compressor can overheat and become permanently
damaged.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
505 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
7. Plug in the kit to the accessory power
socket.
u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a
door or window.
u Do not plug any other electronic
devices into other accessory power
sockets.
1Inflating an Under-inflated Tire
3 WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an
enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon
monoxide.
2 Accessory Power Sockets P. 171
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 64
AIR ONLY
side
9. Turn the selector switch to AIR ONLY.
10. Press the inflator switch to turn on the kit.
u The compressor starts to inject air into
the tire.
11. Inflate the tire to the specified air pressure.
ON
Continued
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
Only run the engine to power the air
compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
Handling the Unexpected
8. Start the engine.
u Keep the engine running while injecting
air.
505
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
506 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Pressure Relief Button
Handling the Unexpected
506
12. Turn off the kit.
u Check the pressure gauge on the air
compressor.
u If overinflated, press the pressure relief
button.
13. Unplug the kit from the accessory power
socket.
14. Unscrew the air only hose from the tire
valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
15. Press the pressure relief button until the
gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
16. Repackage and properly stow the kit.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
507 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Vehicles with optional spare tire kit
Changing a Flat Tire
1Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact
spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced.
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a full-size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model. Do not use them with
another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact
spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
NOTICE
Handling the Unexpected
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface, and apply the parking
brake.
2. Move the shift lever to (P .
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
Do not use an unapproved puncture-repairing agent
on a flat tire, as it can damage the tire pressure
sensor.
Continued
507
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
508 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
■ Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
Tool Case
1. Open the trunk floor lid.
2 Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire P. 495
2. Take the tool case out of the trunk. Take
the jack and wheel nut wrench out of the
tool case.
3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.
Spare Tire
Handling the Unexpected
4. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear
of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
Wheel
Blocks
The tire to be replaced.
5. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)
under the vehicle body, near the tire that
needs to be replaced.
508
1Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
The shape of the tool case varies by model.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
509 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
6. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.
Handling the Unexpected
Continued
509
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
510 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
■ How to Set Up the Jack
1How to Set Up the Jack
1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.
3 WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.
Handling the Unexpected
2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in
the image until the top of the jack contacts
the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.
Jack
Handle
Bar
510
Wheel Nut
Wrench as Jack Handle
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or
may not fit the jacking point.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely:
• Do not use while the engine is running.
• Use only where the ground is firm and level.
• Use only at the jacking points.
• Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
• Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
511 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
■ Replacing the Flat Tire
1Replacing the Flat Tire
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
Handling the Unexpected
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, then stop
rotating.
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
94 lbf∙ft (127 N∙m, 13 kgf∙m)
Continued
511
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
512 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
■ Storing the Flat Tire
Spacer Cone
Wing Bolt
Handling the Unexpected
512
1Storing the Flat Tire
1. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire
well.
2. Wrap the spacer cone and spare tire wing
bolt with cloth or paper, and store them in
the spare tire well.
3. Store the jack and tools in the tool case.
Place the tool case and the trunk floor lid on
the flat tire.
4. Close the trunk.
■ TPMS and the Spare Tire
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the
indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. Tire Pressure
Monitor Problem appears on the multi-information display, but this is normal.
If you replace the tire with a full-size tire, the warning message on the multiinformation display and the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will go off after a few
miles (kilometers).
3 WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.
1TPMS and the Spare Tire
The system cannot monitor the pressure of the spare
tire. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure
that it is correct.
Use the TPMS specific wheels. Each is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind
the valve stem.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
513 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter.
1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 516
Checklist
Check for a message on the multi-information display.
● If the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears
2 If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak P. 514
uMake sure the keyless access remote is in its operating range.
2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 137
Check the brightness of the interior lights.
Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness.
● If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
2 Battery P. 484
If the interior lights come on normally 2 Fuses P. 526
Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 348
Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
●
The starter turns over normally
but the engine doesn’t start.
There may be a problem with the
fuse. Check each of the items on
the right and respond accordingly.
Handling the Unexpected
Starter condition
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The battery may be dead. Check
each of the items on the right and
respond accordingly.
2 Immobilizer System P. 131
Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 97
Check the fuse.
Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 530
If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 531
513
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
514 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak
If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak
Handling the Unexpected
514
If the beeper sounds, the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message
appears on the multi-information display, the indicator on the ENGINE START/
STOP button flashes, and the engine won’t start. Start the engine as follows.
1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the A logo on the keyless
access remote while the indicator on the
ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing.
The buttons on the keyless access remote
should be facing you.
u The indicator flashes for about 30
seconds.
2. Depress the brake pedal and press the
ENGINE START/STOP button within 10
seconds after the beeper sounds while the
indicator stays on.
u If you do not depress the pedal, the
mode will change to ACCESSORY.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
515 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop
Emergency Engine Stop
The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an
emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the
following operations:
• Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds.
• Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice.
Do not press the button while driving unless it is
absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched
off.
Handling the Unexpected
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables
the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will
require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use
both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a
safe place.
The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped.
To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, move the shift lever to (P after the vehicle
comes to a complete stop.
1Emergency Engine Stop
515
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
516 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Jump Starting
■ Jump Starting Procedure
1Jump Starting
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,
then open the hood.
1. Open the fuse box cover on the positive +
terminal.
3 WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Handling the Unexpected
Booster Battery
516
2. Connect the first jumper cable to your
vehicle’s battery + terminal.
3. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery + terminal.
u If you use a booster battery, only use a
12-volt booster battery.
u When using an automotive battery
charger, select a charging voltage lower
than 15-volts. Check the charger manual
for the proper setting.
4. Connect the second jumper cable to the
booster battery - terminal.
Securely attach the jumper cable clips so that they do
not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
517 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuJump Startingu
5. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the engine hanger as
shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to
any other part.
6. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
7. Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
Handling the Unexpected
Continued
517
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
518 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuJump Startingu
■ What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s ground.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.
Handling the Unexpected
518
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
519 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Shift Lever Does Not Move
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.
■ Releasing the Lock
Slot
Cover
5. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
6. While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button and place the shift lever
into (N .
u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
Release
Button
Handling the Unexpected
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the built-in key from the keyless
access remote.
3. Open the lid of the center pocket.
4. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flattip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock
release slot as shown in the image, and
remove the cover.
Shift Lock Release Slot
519
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
520 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
• The temperature gauge needle is at the H mark or the engine suddenly loses
power.
• Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
■ First thing to do
Handling the Unexpected
520
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then open the hood.
1How to Handle Overheating
3 WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood or engine
compartment if steam is coming out.
NOTICE
Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge
needle at the H mark may damage the engine.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
521 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
■ Next thing to do
1How to Handle Overheating
MAX
Reserve
Tank
MIN
■ Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge.
If the temperature gauge needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone
down, contact a dealer for repairs.
3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.
Handling the Unexpected
1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the temperature
gauge needle comes down.
u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, add coolant until it reaches the
MAX mark.
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.
521
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
522 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
■ What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
1. Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
■ What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about three minutes.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE
Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
2 Oil Check P. 458
Handling the Unexpected
522
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.
u The indicator goes off: Start driving again.
u The indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Stop the engine
and contact a dealer for repairs immediately.
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the battery is not being charged.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical
systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.
1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the battery.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
523 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
U.S.
Canada
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• The brake fluid is low.
• There is a malfunction in the brake system.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
NOTICE
If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary, downshift
the gears.
Handling the Unexpected
• Comes on if there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system.
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
dealer.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come
on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution
system is not working. This can result in vehicle
instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
523
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
524 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system.
• If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
Handling the Unexpected
524
If the Electric Parking Brake System Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when there is a problem with the electric parking brake
system.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Avoid using the parking brake and immediately get your vehicle
inspected at a dealer.
■ What to do when the electric parking brake indicator comes on
or blinks at the same time.
• Release the parking brake. If you cannot release it, immediately stop
the vehicle in a safe place and call a dealer.
• If only the electric parking brake indicator goes off, immediately get
your vehicle inspected at a dealer.
• If the electric parking brake indicator remains on or blinks even after
releasing the parking brake, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and call a dealer.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
525 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink
* Not available on all models
NOTICE
Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
Handling the Unexpected
A tire pressure is significantly low. If there is a problem with the TPMS or
the compact spare tire * is installed, the indicator blinks for about one
minute, and then stays on.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver’s side doorjamb.
■ What to do when the indicator blinks
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire * causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire.
The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
525
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
526 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working, set
the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
and check to see if any applicable fuse is
blown.
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push
the tabs to open the box.
■ Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Handling the Unexpected
526
There are three fuse boxes in the engine
compartment.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
* Not available on all models
Circuit Protected
IG1A ACG FR
IG1A MISS SOL1
−
−
SMART
IG1B ECU FR
IG1B OP FR
IGP2
DBW
IGP
IG Coil
ACM
−
Interior Lights
Amps
15 A
10 A
−
−
(7.5 A)
7.5 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
20 A
−
10 A
Circuit Protected
15
Back Up Radio
16
Back Up
17
MG Clutch
18
Front Washer
19
Stop
20 Right Headlight High Beam
21
Trunk
22
Small
23
−
24 Left Headlight High Beam
25
−
26 Right Headlight Low Beam
27 Left Headlight Low Beam
28
IGP2 Sub
29
Power Rear Sunshade *
30
Headlight Washer *
31
Wiper
Amps
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
15 A
−
10 A
−
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
(20 A)
30 A
30 A
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
527 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Located near the battery. Push the tabs to
open the box.
1
2
Circuit Protected
Main Fuse
Horn & Hazard
R/B Main 2
ABS/VSA RLY
RFC
R/B Main 3
AS F/B Main 2
ABS/VSA Motor
Heater Motor
Amps
150 A
30 A
60 A
30 A
50 A
50 A
60 A
40 A
40 A
Amps
60 A
60 A
60 A
30 A
60 A
30 A
Located near the + terminal on the battery.
Push the tabs to open the box.
40 A
40 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
20 A
15 A
−
−
10 A
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected
EPS
Amps
80 A
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected
R/B Main 1
DR F/B Main 1
AS F/B Main 1
IG Main 1
3
DR F/B Main 2
IG Main 2
Left Precision All Wheel
Steer
Rear Defroster
4
ST MG
5 Left Electric Parking Brake
6 Right Electric Parking Brake
7
Injector
8
Hazard
9
−
10
−
11
Horn
527
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
528 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuFusesuFuse Locations
■ Driver’s Side Interior Fuse Box
Located under the dashboard.
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
1
2
3
4
5
Handling the Unexpected
Fuse Label
Fuse locations are shown on the label on
the under panel.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
number and label number.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
528
* Not available on all models
Circuit Protected
Driver’s Side Door Lock
Passenger’s Side Door Lock
Driver’s Door Lock
Driver’s Side Door Unlock
Passenger’s Side Door
Unlock
Driver’s Door Unlock
Door Lock
−
Tilt Steering Wheel
IG1 DR1
Meter
IG1 Box
ACCESSORY
−
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
Moonroof
Rear Driver’s Side Power
Window
Telescopic Steering Wheel
Driver’s Power Window
Left e-pretensioner *
Fuel Pump
−
ST Cut
IG1 DR2
Amps
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
20 A
−
20 A
7.5 A
10 A
20 A
7.5 A
−
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
(20 A)
20 A
−
7.5 A
7.5 A
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Circuit Protected
Start DIAG
A/C
DRL
ACC Key Lock
Driver’s Lumbar Support
SMART
−
Driver’s Power Seat
Reclining
Right Precision All Wheel
Steer
IG1 Box
Amps
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
−
20 A
40 A
30 A
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
529 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuFusesuFuse Locations
■ Passenger’s Side Interior Fuse
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
Box
Located on the lower side panel. Take off
the cover to open.
Cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fuse Label
Fuse locations are shown on the cover.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
* Not available on all models
Amps
−
20 A
20 A
7.5 A
−
−
20 A
20 A
(20 A)
−
15 A
20 A
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Circuit Protected
ABS/VSA
−
e-pretensioner *
−
SRS2
Illumination
Right e-pretensioner *
Heated Steering Wheel *
28
Audio AMP
Amps
7.5 A
−
(7.5 A)
−
7.5 A
7.5 A
(20 A)
10 A
30 A*1
40 A*2
*1:Models without surround view camera
system
*2:Models with surround view camera
system
Handling the Unexpected
7
Circuit Protected
−
Front Seat Heaters/AVS
Rear Passenger’s Side
Power Window
Front Passenger’s Lumbar
Support
−
−
Passenger’s Power Seat
Sliding
Passenger’s Power Seat
Reclining
Rear Seat Heaters *
−
Fly Start
Accessory Power Socket
(Console Compartment)
Accessory Power Socket
(Center Pocket)
AS ECU
Glove Box
−
−
Front Passenger’s Power
Window
SRS1
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
−
−
20 A
10 A
529
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
530 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK). Turn headlights and all accessories
off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment.
u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.
Blown Fuse
Combined Fuse
Handling the Unexpected
530
NOTICE
Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage.
Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on
P. 526 to 529.
There is a fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse
box located near the brake fluid reservoir.
Blown
Fuse
Fuse Puller
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it
with the fuse puller and replace it with a
new one.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
531 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
■ Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the only way you can safely transport your vehicle.
Any other towing method will damage the vehicle’s drive system.
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle's weight.
NOTICE
Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
Handling the Unexpected
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.
531
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
532 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure.
1. Open the trunk and remove the cover.
Cover
Handling the Unexpected
532
2. Pull the release lever toward you.
u The release lever unlocks the fuel fill door
when it is pulled.
Release Lever
1When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have
your vehicle checked.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
533 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
When You Cannot Open the Trunk
If you cannot open the trunk, use the following procedure.
1. Open the trunk pass-through cover.
Trunk Release Handle
2 Trunk Pass-through Cover P. 174
2. Pull the trunk release handle down.
What to do-following up
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have
your vehicle checked.
Handling the Unexpected
Trunk Pass-through Cover
1When You Cannot Open the Trunk
533
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
534 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Refueling
Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel
container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Press the fuel fill door release button.
u The fuel fill door opens.
3. Take the funnel out of the tool case in the
trunk.
Funnel
Case
2 Types of Tools P. 494
Handling the Unexpected
534
4. Remove the funnel from the case.
5. Place the end of the funnel on the lower
part of filler opening, then insert it slowly
and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the funnel
goes down along with the filler pipe.
6. Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel
container.
u Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any.
7. Remove the funnel from the filler neck.
u Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before
storing it.
8. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
3 WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
NOTICE
Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container
or any funnel other than the one provided with your
vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system.
Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel
tank with foreign objects. This can damage the fuel
system and its seal.
Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is
gasoline before you refuel.
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
535 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle’s specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 536
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine
Number and Transmission Number .... 538
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 539
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 540
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 541
Warranty Coverages ........................ 543
Authorized Manuals......................... 545
Client Service Information ............... 546
535
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
536 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Specifications
■ Vehicle Specifications
■ Engine Specifications
Model
No. of Passengers:
Front
Rear
Total
Weights:
Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type
Charge Quantity
Lubricant Type
Displacement
Spark Plugs
Acura RLX
2
3
5
U.S.: 4,993 lbs (2,265 kg)
Canada: 2,265 kg
U.S.: 2,778 lbs (1,260 kg)
Canada: 1,260 kg
U.S.: 2,271 lbs (1,030 kg)
Canada: 1,030 kg
■ Fuel
Type
Fuel Tank Capacity
Unleaded premium gasoline, Pump octane
number of 91 or higher
18.5 US gal (70 ℓ)
■ Washer Fluid
Tank Capacity
HFC-134a (R-134a)
16.0 - 17.8 oz (455 - 505 g)
ND-OIL 8
212 cu-in (3,471 cm3)
NGK
DILZKR7B11G
U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)
Canada: 5.3 US qt (5.0 ℓ)
■ Light Bulbs
Information
Headlights (Low Beam)
Headlights (High Beam)
Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights
Front Side Marker Lights
Side Turn Signal Lights
(on Door Mirrors)
Brake/Taillights/Rear Side Marker
Lights
Taillights
Back-Up Lights
Rear Turn Signal Lights
High-Mount Brake Light
Rear License Plate Lights
Door Outer Handle Ambient Lights
Interior Lights
Front and Rear Map Lights
Front and Rear Ambient Lights
Vanity Mirror Lights
Front Door Pocket Lights
Center Pocket Light
Beverage Holder Light
Door Courtesy Lights
Console Compartment Light
Glove Box Light
Front and Rear*1 Foot Lights
Door Inner Handle Lights
Trunk Light
*1: Not available on all models
536
LED
LED
27/8W (Amber)
2CP
LED
LED
LED
16W
21W
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
2.1W
LED
LED
LED
3.4W
LED
LED
LED
LED
5W
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
537 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuSpecificationsu
■ Brake Fluid
Specified
■ Engine Oil
Acura Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
■ Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified
Capacity
Recommended
Capacity
Acura ATF DW-1
(automatic transmission fluid)
Change
3.3 US qt (3.1 ℓ)
■ Tire
·Genuine Acura Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Change
4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)
Change
including
4.5 US qt (4.3 ℓ)
filter
Regular
Compact
Spare*1
Wheel Size
■ Engine Coolant
Specified
Ratio
Capacity
Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Regular
Compact Spare*1
245/40R19 98W
Front 35 (240 [2.4])
Rear 33 (230 [2.3])
T155/70D17 110M
60 (420 [4.2])
19 x 8J
17 x 4T
*1: Vehicles with optional spare tire kit
Acura Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
50/50 with distilled water
2.1 US gal (8.0 ℓ)
(change including the remaining
0.225 US gal (0.85 ℓ) in the reserve tank)
Information
537
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
538 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number
and Transmission Number
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.
The locations of your vehicle's VIN, engine number and transmission number are
shown as follows.
1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number and
Transmission Number
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is
located under the cover.
Vehicle Identification Number
Engine Number
Cover
Automatic
Transmission
Number
Information
538
Vehicle Identification Number
Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification Number
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
539 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in operation.
AcuraLink
Audio System
Blind Spot Information System
Bluetooth® Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
Immobilizer System
Keyless Access System
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards of FCC
(Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada Standard, described below:
Information
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
539
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
540 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
Information
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
540
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
541 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has “Readiness Codes,” as part of the onboard self diagnostic system.
Some States use these codes as a test to see if your vehicle's emissions components
are working properly.
The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without starting the engine. The
malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the
readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.
1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only after several days of
driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
Continued
Information
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for six hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in (P . Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there
for about three minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
541
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
542 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D . Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without
moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you
cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for
at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
Information
542
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
543 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Warranty Coverages
■ U.S.Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for
rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.
Information
Accessory Limited Warranty – Acura accessories are covered under this warranty.
Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Acura replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.
Continued
543
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
544 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuWarranty Coveragesu
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from a dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Acura
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
■ Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
Information
544
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
545 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Authorized Manuals
■ Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
■ For U.S. Owners:
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by
phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.
■ For Canadian Owners:
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.
Information
545
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
546 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
Client Service Information
Acura dealership personnel are trained professionals.
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that
your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the
dealership’s service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s management, contact Acura Client Relations/
Services.
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Acura Client Relations
Mail Stop 500-2N-7E 1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 382-2238
Information
546
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands:
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
Canadian Owners:
Honda Canada Inc.
Acura Client Services
180 Honda Boulevard Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-866-78-ACURA
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: acura_cr@ch.honda.com
1Client Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
• Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number and Transmission
Number P. 538
• Date of purchase
• Odometer reading of your vehicle
• Your name, address, and telephone number
• A detailed description of the problem
• Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
547 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuClient Service Informationu
■ Gracenote Music Recognition
Service (CDDB)
■ Gracenote® END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
This application or device contains software
from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville,
California (“Gracenote”). The software
from Gracenote (the “Gracenote
Software”) enables this application to
perform disc and/or file identification and
obtain music- related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or
embedded databases (collectively,
“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote Data
only by means of the intended End-User
functions or this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal noncommercial use only.
You agree not to assign, copy, transfer, or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any
Gracenote Data to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to
use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If
your license terminates, you agree to cease
any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers.
Continued
Information
Music recognition technology and related
data are provided by Gracenote®.
Gracenote is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and related content
delivery.
For more information, visit
www.gracenote.com.
When music is recorded to the HDD from a
CD, information such as the recording artist
and track name are retrieved from the
Gracenote Database and displayed (when
available).
Gracenote may not contain information for
all albums.
Gracenote is an internet-based music
recognition service that allows artist, album,
and track information from CDs to display
on the HDD.
Gracenote users are allowed 4 free updates
a year. More information about Gracenote,
its features, and downloads are available at
www.acura.com (in U.S.) or www.acura.ca
(in Canada).
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright © 2000 to present
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright
© 2000 to present Gracenote.
One or more patents owned by Gracenote
apply to this product and service. See the
Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list
of applicable Gracenote patents.
Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS,
the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the
“Powered by Gracenote” logo are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of
Gracenote in the United States and/or other
countries.
547
16 ACURA RLX-31TY26200.book
548 ページ
２０１４年１２月１６日
火曜日
午後５時３６分
uuClient Service Informationu
Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide.
You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce
its rights under this Agreement against you
directly in its own name.
Information
The Gracenote service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly
assigned numeric identifier is to allow the
Gracenote service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote
service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or
warranties, express or implied, regarding
the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in
the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves
the right to delete data from the Gracenote
Servers or to change data categories for any
548
cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No
warranty is made that the Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers are errorfree or that functioning of Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers will be
uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you
with new enhanced or additional data types
or categories that Gracenote may provide in
the future and is free to discontinue its
services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES
NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE
OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES.
© Gracenote 2009
■ Disclaimer of Pandora®
Requirements to access Pandora®
• Latest version of the Pandora app
installed on your Android, Blackberry, or
iPhone.
• Registered Pandora account (you can
create a free account at
www.pandora.com Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.7 Linearized : No Create Date : 2014:12:17 09:46:19-08:00 Modify Date : 2014:12:17 13:07:21-08:00 Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03 Metadata Date : 2014:12:17 13:07:21-08:00 Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:579794a5-f21d-4c8c-b8bb-cbf4aed94282 Instance ID : uuid:0d93c343-5245-4850-a8ce-011b3086a2d1 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 561EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools